You can not select more than 25 topics
Topics must start with a letter or number, can include dashes ('-') and can be up to 35 characters long.
7226 lines
226 KiB
7226 lines
226 KiB
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
|
%
|
|
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\def\texinfoversion{2006-02-13.16}
|
|
%
|
|
% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
|
|
% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Free
|
|
% Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|
%
|
|
% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
|
|
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
|
% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
|
|
% your option) any later version.
|
|
%
|
|
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
|
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
|
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
|
% General Public License for more details.
|
|
%
|
|
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
|
% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
|
|
% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
|
|
% Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
|
|
%
|
|
% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
|
|
% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
|
|
% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
|
|
%
|
|
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
|
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
|
% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
|
|
% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
|
|
% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
|
|
% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
|
|
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
|
|
%
|
|
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
|
|
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
|
|
% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
|
|
%
|
|
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
|
|
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
|
|
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
|
% texindex foo.??
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
|
% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
|
|
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
|
|
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
|
|
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
|
|
%
|
|
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
|
|
% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
|
|
% full Texinfo distribution.
|
|
%
|
|
% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
|
|
|
|
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
|
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
|
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
|
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
|
|
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
|
|
|
\message{Basics,}
|
|
\chardef\other=12
|
|
|
|
% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
|
|
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
|
|
\let\+ = \relax
|
|
|
|
% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
|
|
\let\ptexb=\b
|
|
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
|
\let\ptexc=\c
|
|
\let\ptexcomma=\,
|
|
\let\ptexdot=\.
|
|
\let\ptexdots=\dots
|
|
\let\ptexend=\end
|
|
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
|
\let\ptexexclam=\!
|
|
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
|
\let\ptexgtr=>
|
|
\let\ptexhat=^
|
|
\let\ptexi=\i
|
|
\let\ptexindent=\indent
|
|
\let\ptexinsert=\insert
|
|
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
|
\let\ptexless=<
|
|
\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
|
|
\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
|
|
\let\ptexplus=+
|
|
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
|
\let\ptexslash=\/
|
|
\let\ptexstar=\*
|
|
\let\ptext=\t
|
|
|
|
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
|
% starts a new line in the output.
|
|
\newlinechar = `^^J
|
|
|
|
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
|
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
|
%
|
|
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
|
\let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
|
|
\else
|
|
\def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
|
\fi
|
|
|
|
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
|
|
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
|
|
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
|
|
|
|
% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
|
|
\chardef\spacecat = 10
|
|
\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
|
|
|
|
% Ignore a token.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\gobble#1{}
|
|
|
|
% The following is used inside several \edef's.
|
|
\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
|
% Hyphenation fixes.
|
|
\hyphenation{
|
|
Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
|
|
ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
|
|
data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
|
|
man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
|
|
par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
|
|
spell-ing spell-ings
|
|
stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
|
|
wide-spread wrap-around
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
|
\newdimen\bindingoffset
|
|
\newdimen\normaloffset
|
|
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
|
|
|
|
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
|
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
|
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
|
|
|
|
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
|
|
% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
|
|
% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
|
|
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
|
|
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\|{%
|
|
% \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
|
|
\leavevmode
|
|
%
|
|
% Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
|
|
\vadjust{%
|
|
% We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
|
|
% leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
|
|
\vskip-\baselineskip
|
|
%
|
|
% \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
|
|
% the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
|
|
\llap{%
|
|
%
|
|
% For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
|
|
\vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
|
|
%
|
|
% This is the space between the bar and the text.
|
|
\hskip 12pt
|
|
}%
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
|
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
|
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
|
|
% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
|
|
% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
|
\def\loggingall{%
|
|
\tracingstats2
|
|
\tracingpages1
|
|
\tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
|
|
\tracingparagraphs1
|
|
\tracingoutput1
|
|
\tracingmacros2
|
|
\tracingrestores1
|
|
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
|
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
|
|
\tracingscantokens1
|
|
\tracingifs1
|
|
\tracinggroups1
|
|
\tracingnesting2
|
|
\tracingassigns1
|
|
\fi
|
|
\tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
|
|
\errorcontextlines16
|
|
}%
|
|
|
|
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
|
|
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
|
|
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
|
|
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
|
|
|
|
% For @cropmarks command.
|
|
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
|
|
%
|
|
\newif\ifcropmarks
|
|
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
|
|
%
|
|
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
|
|
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
|
|
%
|
|
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
|
|
\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
|
|
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
|
|
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
|
|
|
% Main output routine.
|
|
\chardef\PAGE = 255
|
|
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
|
|
|
\newbox\headlinebox
|
|
\newbox\footlinebox
|
|
|
|
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
|
|
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
|
|
\def\onepageout#1{%
|
|
\ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
|
|
%
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
|
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
|
% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
|
\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
|
|
\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
|
|
%
|
|
{%
|
|
% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
|
% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
|
% before the \shipout runs.
|
|
%
|
|
\indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
|
\normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
|
|
% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
|
|
% We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
|
|
% \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
|
|
% "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
|
|
% it needs to be
|
|
% {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
|
|
\shipout\vbox{%
|
|
% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
|
|
\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
|
|
\hsize = \outerhsize
|
|
\vskip-\topandbottommargin
|
|
\vtop to0pt{%
|
|
\line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
|
\line{%
|
|
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
|
\hfill
|
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\vss}%
|
|
\vskip\topandbottommargin
|
|
\line\bgroup
|
|
\hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
|
|
\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
|
|
\vbox\bgroup
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\unvbox\headlinebox
|
|
\pagebody{#1}%
|
|
\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
|
% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
|
% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
|
|
% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
|
\vskip 2\baselineskip
|
|
\unvbox\footlinebox
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\ifcropmarks
|
|
\egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
|
|
\hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
|
|
\vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
|
|
\boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
|
|
\vbox to0pt{\vss
|
|
\line{%
|
|
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
|
\hfill
|
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
|
\line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
|
|
\fi
|
|
}% end of \shipout\vbox
|
|
}% end of group with \indexdummies
|
|
\advancepageno
|
|
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
|
|
|
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
|
{\catcode`\@ =11
|
|
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
|
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
|
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
|
\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
|
\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
|
|
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
|
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
|
|
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
|
|
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
|
|
%
|
|
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
|
|
\def\nstop{\vbox
|
|
{\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
|
|
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
|
|
\def\nsbot{\vbox
|
|
{\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
|
|
|
|
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
|
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
|
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
|
|
\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
|
|
\def\next{#2}%
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\obeylines
|
|
\spaceisspace
|
|
#1%
|
|
\parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
{\obeylines %
|
|
\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
|
\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
|
\argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
|
|
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
|
|
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
|
|
|
|
% Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
|
|
%
|
|
% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
|
|
% @end itemize @c foo
|
|
% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
|
|
% by \finishparsearg.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
|
|
\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
|
|
\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
|
|
\def\temp{#3}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty
|
|
% We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run;
|
|
% thus we reuse \temp.
|
|
\let\temp\finishparsearg
|
|
\else
|
|
\let\temp\argcheckspaces
|
|
\fi
|
|
% Put the space token in:
|
|
\temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
|
|
% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
|
|
% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
|
|
% just before passing the control to \next.
|
|
% (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
|
|
% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
|
|
% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
|
|
%
|
|
% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}}
|
|
|
|
% \parseargdef\foo{...}
|
|
% is roughly equivalent to
|
|
% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
|
|
% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
|
|
%
|
|
% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
|
|
% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
|
|
|
|
\def\parseargdef#1{%
|
|
\expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
|
|
}
|
|
\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
|
|
\def#2{\parsearg#1}%
|
|
\def#1##1%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Several utility definitions with active space:
|
|
{
|
|
\obeyspaces
|
|
\gdef\obeyedspace{ }
|
|
|
|
% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
|
% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
|
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
|
% should produce a line of output anyway.
|
|
%
|
|
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
|
|
|
|
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
|
% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
|
% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
|
\gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
|
|
|
% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
|
|
%
|
|
% \envdef\foo{...}
|
|
% \def\Efoo{...}
|
|
%
|
|
% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
|
|
% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
|
|
% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
|
|
% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
|
|
% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
|
|
%
|
|
% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
|
|
% are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The
|
|
% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
|
|
% special case.)
|
|
|
|
|
|
% At runtime, environments start with this:
|
|
\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
|
|
% initialize
|
|
\let\thisenv\empty
|
|
|
|
% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
|
|
\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
|
\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
|
|
|
% Check whether we're in the right environment:
|
|
\def\checkenv#1{%
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\thisenv\temp
|
|
\else
|
|
\badenverr
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Evironment mismatch, #1 expected:
|
|
\def\badenverr{%
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|
\errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
|
|
not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
|
}
|
|
\def\inenvironment#1{%
|
|
\ifx#1\empty
|
|
out of any environment%
|
|
\else
|
|
in environment \expandafter\string#1%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
|
% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\end{%
|
|
\if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
|
|
\else
|
|
% The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
|
|
\expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
|
|
\csname E#1\endcsname
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
|
|
|
|
|
|
%% Simple single-character @ commands
|
|
|
|
% @@ prints an @
|
|
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
|
|
\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
|
|
|
|
% This is turned off because it was never documented
|
|
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
|
|
%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
|
|
%% but suppressing ligatures.
|
|
%\def\`{{`}}
|
|
%\def\'{{'}}
|
|
|
|
% Used to generate quoted braces.
|
|
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
|
|
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
|
|
\let\{=\mylbrace
|
|
\let\}=\myrbrace
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
% Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
|
|
% and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
|
|
\catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
|
|
\catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
|
|
\catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
|
|
!gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
|
|
!gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
|
|
!gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
|
|
!gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
|
|
!endgroup
|
|
|
|
% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
|
|
\let\comma = ,
|
|
|
|
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
|
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
|
|
\let\, = \c
|
|
\let\dotaccent = \.
|
|
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
|
\let\tieaccent = \t
|
|
\let\ubaraccent = \b
|
|
\let\udotaccent = \d
|
|
|
|
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
|
|
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
|
|
\def\questiondown{?`}
|
|
\def\exclamdown{!`}
|
|
\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
|
|
\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
|
|
|
|
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
|
\def\imacro{i}
|
|
\def\jmacro{j}
|
|
\def\dotless#1{%
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
|
|
\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
|
|
% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
|
|
%
|
|
\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
|
|
|
|
% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
|
|
% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
|
|
% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
|
|
% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
|
|
% \scriptscriptstyle).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\LaTeX{%
|
|
L\kern-.36em
|
|
{\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
|
|
\vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
|
|
\kern-.15em
|
|
\TeX
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
|
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
|
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
|
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
|
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
|
{\catcode`@ = 11
|
|
% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
|
% if the definition is written into an index file.
|
|
\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
|
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
|
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
|
|
|
% @* forces a line break.
|
|
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
|
|
|
% @/ allows a line break.
|
|
\let\/=\allowbreak
|
|
|
|
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
|
\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
|
|
|
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
|
\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
|
|
|
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
|
\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
|
|
|
% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\onword{on}
|
|
\def\offword{off}
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
|
|
\else
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
|
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
|
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
|
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
|
|
|
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
|
% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
|
% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
|
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
|
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
|
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
|
% the text is small, which looks bad.
|
|
%
|
|
% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
|
|
% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
|
|
% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
|
|
% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
|
|
% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
|
|
% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
|
|
%
|
|
\newbox\groupbox
|
|
\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
|
|
%
|
|
\envdef\group{%
|
|
\ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
|
|
\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
|
\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
|
%
|
|
\setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
|
|
% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
|
% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
|
% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
|
% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
|
% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
|
% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
|
\comment
|
|
}
|
|
%
|
|
% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
|
|
% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
|
|
% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
|
% above. But it's pretty close.
|
|
\def\Egroup{%
|
|
% To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
|
|
% and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
|
|
\endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
|
|
\global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
|
|
\egroup % End the \vtop.
|
|
% \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
|
|
\dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
|
|
% \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
|
|
\dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
|
|
% if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
|
|
% group, force a page break.
|
|
\ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
|
|
\ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
|
|
\page
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\box\groupbox
|
|
\prevdepth = \dimen1
|
|
\checkinserts
|
|
}
|
|
%
|
|
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
|
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
|
%
|
|
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
|
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
|
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
|
|
|
% @need space-in-mils
|
|
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
|
|
|
\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
|
|
|
% Old definition--didn't work.
|
|
%\parseargdef\need{\par %
|
|
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
|
|
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
|
|
%{\baselineskip=0pt%
|
|
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
|
|
%\prevdepth=-1000pt
|
|
%}}
|
|
|
|
\parseargdef\need{%
|
|
% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
|
% paragraph.
|
|
\par
|
|
%
|
|
% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
|
|
\dimen0 = #1\mil
|
|
\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
|
|
\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
|
|
%
|
|
% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
|
|
% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
|
|
% And a page break here is fine.
|
|
\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
|
|
%
|
|
% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
|
% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
|
% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
|
% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
|
% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
|
%
|
|
% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
|
% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
|
% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
|
% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
|
% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
|
% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
|
% document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
|
\penalty9999
|
|
%
|
|
% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
|
\kern -#1\mil
|
|
%
|
|
% Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
|
\nobreak
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
|
|
|
|
\let\br = \par
|
|
|
|
% @page forces the start of a new page.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
|
|
|
% @exdent text....
|
|
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
|
|
|
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
|
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
|
\newskip\exdentamount
|
|
|
|
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
|
\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
|
|
|
|
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
|
\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
|
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
|
|
|
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
|
|
% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
|
|
% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
|
|
%
|
|
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
|
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
|
|
\nobreak
|
|
\kern-\strutdepth
|
|
\vtop to \strutdepth{%
|
|
\baselineskip=\strutdepth
|
|
\vss
|
|
% if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
|
|
% make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
|
|
\ifx#1l%
|
|
\llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\null
|
|
}%
|
|
}}
|
|
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
|
|
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
|
|
%
|
|
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
|
|
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
|
|
% else use TEXT for both).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
|
|
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|
\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
|
|
\def\righttext{#2}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
|
|
\def\righttext{#1}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\ifodd\pageno
|
|
\def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
|
|
\else
|
|
\def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\temp
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @include file insert text of that file as input.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
|
|
\def\includezzz#1{%
|
|
\pushthisfilestack
|
|
\def\thisfile{#1}%
|
|
{%
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|
\def\temp{\input #1 }%
|
|
\expandafter
|
|
}\temp
|
|
\popthisfilestack
|
|
}
|
|
\def\filenamecatcodes{%
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
|
\catcode`~=\other
|
|
\catcode`^=\other
|
|
\catcode`_=\other
|
|
\catcode`|=\other
|
|
\catcode`<=\other
|
|
\catcode`>=\other
|
|
\catcode`+=\other
|
|
\catcode`-=\other
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestack{%
|
|
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
|
|
}
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
|
|
\expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
|
|
}
|
|
\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
|
|
\gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
|
|
\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
|
|
the stack of filenames is empty.}}
|
|
|
|
\def\thisfile{}
|
|
|
|
% @center line
|
|
% outputs that line, centered.
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\center{%
|
|
\ifhmode
|
|
\let\next\centerH
|
|
\else
|
|
\let\next\centerV
|
|
\fi
|
|
\next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
|
|
}
|
|
\def\centerH#1{%
|
|
{%
|
|
\hfil\break
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
|
\line{#1}%
|
|
\break
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
|
|
|
|
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
|
|
|
\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
|
|
|
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
|
% @c is the same as @comment
|
|
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
|
|
|
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
|
|
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
|
|
\commentxxx}
|
|
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
|
|
|
|
\let\c=\comment
|
|
|
|
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
|
|
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
|
|
% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
|
|
% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
|
|
\def\noneword{none}
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
|
\defaultparindent = 0pt
|
|
\else
|
|
\defaultparindent = #1em
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\parindent = \defaultparindent
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @exampleindent NCHARS
|
|
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
|
|
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
|
|
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
|
|
\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0pt
|
|
\else
|
|
\lispnarrowing = #1em
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @firstparagraphindent WORD
|
|
% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
|
|
% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
|
|
% paragraphs.
|
|
%
|
|
% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
|
|
% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
|
|
% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
|
|
% By default, we suppress indentation.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
|
\def\insertword{insert}
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
|
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\insertword
|
|
\let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
|
|
\else
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
|
|
% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
|
|
%
|
|
% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
|
|
% paragraph.
|
|
%
|
|
\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
|
|
\gdef\indent{%
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
|
\indent
|
|
}%
|
|
\gdef\noindent{%
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
|
\noindent
|
|
}%
|
|
\global\everypar = {%
|
|
\kern -\parindent
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
|
|
\global \let \indent = \ptexindent
|
|
\global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
|
|
\global \everypar = {}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\asis#1{#1}
|
|
|
|
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
|
|
%
|
|
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
|
|
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
|
|
% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
|
|
% which is what @var uses.
|
|
{
|
|
\catcode`\_ = \active
|
|
\gdef\mathunderscore{%
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
|
\def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
|
|
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
|
|
% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
|
|
% otherwise define @\.
|
|
%
|
|
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
|
|
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\math{%
|
|
\tex
|
|
\mathunderscore
|
|
\let\\ = \mathbackslash
|
|
\mathactive
|
|
$\finishmath
|
|
}
|
|
\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
|
|
|
|
% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
|
|
% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
|
|
% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
|
|
%
|
|
{
|
|
\catcode`^ = \active
|
|
\catcode`< = \active
|
|
\catcode`> = \active
|
|
\catcode`+ = \active
|
|
\gdef\mathactive{%
|
|
\let^ = \ptexhat
|
|
\let< = \ptexless
|
|
\let> = \ptexgtr
|
|
\let+ = \ptexplus
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
|
|
\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
|
|
\def\minus{$-$}
|
|
|
|
% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
|
|
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
|
|
% font as three actual period characters.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\dots{%
|
|
\leavevmode
|
|
\hbox to 1.5em{%
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil
|
|
.\hfil.\hfil.%
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\enddots{%
|
|
\dots
|
|
\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
|
|
% Texinfo's parsing.
|
|
%
|
|
\let\comma = ,
|
|
|
|
% @refill is a no-op.
|
|
\let\refill=\relax
|
|
|
|
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
|
|
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
|
|
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
|
|
%
|
|
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
|
|
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
|
|
|
|
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
|
|
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
|
|
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
|
|
\def\setfilename{%
|
|
\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
|
|
\iflinks
|
|
\tryauxfile
|
|
% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
|
|
\immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
|
|
\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
|
|
\openindices
|
|
\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
|
|
%
|
|
% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
|
|
% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
|
|
\openin 1 texinfo.cnf
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
|
|
\closein 1
|
|
%
|
|
\comment % Ignore the actual filename.
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Called from \setfilename.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\openindices{%
|
|
\newindex{cp}%
|
|
\newcodeindex{fn}%
|
|
\newcodeindex{vr}%
|
|
\newcodeindex{tp}%
|
|
\newcodeindex{ky}%
|
|
\newcodeindex{pg}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @bye.
|
|
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{pdf,}
|
|
% adobe `portable' document format
|
|
\newcount\tempnum
|
|
\newcount\lnkcount
|
|
\newtoks\filename
|
|
\newcount\filenamelength
|
|
\newcount\pgn
|
|
\newtoks\toksA
|
|
\newtoks\toksB
|
|
\newtoks\toksC
|
|
\newtoks\toksD
|
|
\newbox\boxA
|
|
\newcount\countA
|
|
\newif\ifpdf
|
|
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
|
|
|
|
% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
|
|
% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
|
|
% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutput\relax
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifcase\pdfoutput
|
|
\else
|
|
\pdftrue
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
|
|
% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
|
|
% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
|
|
% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
|
|
% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
|
|
% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
|
|
% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
|
|
% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
|
|
% that's what we do).
|
|
|
|
% double active backslashes.
|
|
%
|
|
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
|
|
@gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
|
|
@catcode`@\=@active
|
|
@let\=@doublebackslash}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
|
|
% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
|
|
% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens. I've
|
|
% tinkered with it a little for texinfo, but it's definitely from there.
|
|
%
|
|
% #1 is the tokens to replace.
|
|
% #2 is the replacement.
|
|
% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
|
|
\def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
|
|
##1%
|
|
\ifx\\##2\\%
|
|
\else
|
|
#2%
|
|
\HyReturnAfterFi{%
|
|
\HyPsdReplace##2\END
|
|
}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}%
|
|
\xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
|
|
}
|
|
\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
|
|
|
|
% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
|
|
\def\backslashparens#1{%
|
|
\xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
|
|
% \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
|
|
\HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
|
|
\HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|
\input pdfcolor
|
|
\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
|
|
\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
|
|
\def\imagewidth{#2}%
|
|
\def\imageheight{#3}%
|
|
% without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
|
|
% included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
|
\immediate\pdfimage
|
|
\else
|
|
\immediate\pdfximage
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
|
|
\ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
|
|
#1.pdf%
|
|
\else
|
|
{#1.pdf}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
|
|
\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
|
|
\fi}
|
|
\def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
|
|
% We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
|
|
% such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
|
|
\atdummies
|
|
\activebackslashdouble
|
|
\def\pdfdestname{#1}%
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfdestname
|
|
\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz%
|
|
}}%
|
|
%
|
|
% used to mark target names; must be expandable.
|
|
\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}%
|
|
%
|
|
\let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light?
|
|
\def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
|
|
% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
|
|
% come from Petr Olsak
|
|
\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
|
|
\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
|
|
\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
|
|
\advance\tempnum by 1
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
|
|
%
|
|
% #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
|
|
% outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
|
|
% of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
|
|
% which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
|
|
% #4 is the page number
|
|
%
|
|
\def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
|
|
% Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
|
|
% page number. We could generate a destination for the section
|
|
% text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
|
|
% seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
|
|
\def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
|
|
\else
|
|
% Doubled backslashes in the name.
|
|
{\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Also double the backslashes in the display string.
|
|
{\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
|
%
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
|
}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
% Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
|
|
\edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
|
|
\edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
|
|
%
|
|
% Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
|
|
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|
\def\thischapnum{##2}%
|
|
\def\thissecnum{0}%
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|
\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
|
|
\def\thissecnum{##2}%
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|
\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|
\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\def\thischapnum{0}%
|
|
\def\thissecnum{0}%
|
|
\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
|
%
|
|
% use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
|
|
% al. a second time, below.
|
|
\def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
|
|
\def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
|
\def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
|
\def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
|
\def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
|
|
\def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
|
\def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
|
\def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
|
\readdatafile{toc}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
|
|
% The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
|
|
% subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
|
|
%
|
|
% We use the node names as the destinations.
|
|
\def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
|
|
\dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
|
|
%
|
|
% PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
|
|
% document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
|
|
% since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
|
|
% Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
|
|
% Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
|
|
%
|
|
% xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
|
|
% their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
|
|
% now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|
\setupdatafile
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
|
|
\input \jobname.toc
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
|
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
|
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
|
\ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
|
\advance\filenamelength by 1
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\nextsp}
|
|
\def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
|
\let \startlink \pdfannotlink
|
|
\else
|
|
\let \startlink \pdfstartlink
|
|
\fi
|
|
% make a live url in pdf output.
|
|
\def\pdfurl#1{%
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
% it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
|
|
% tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
|
|
% of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
|
|
% people have actually reported a problem with.
|
|
%
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
|
\let\/=\empty
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|
\leavevmode\Red
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
|
user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
|
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
|
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
|
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
|
\def\maketoks{%
|
|
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
|
|
\ifx\first0\adn0
|
|
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
|
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
|
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
|
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
|
\let\next=\maketoks
|
|
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
|
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|
\next}
|
|
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
|
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
|
\def\pdflink#1{%
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
|
|
\linkcolor #1\endlink}
|
|
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
|
\else
|
|
\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
|
|
\let\pdfurl = \gobble
|
|
\let\endlink = \relax
|
|
\let\linkcolor = \relax
|
|
\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
|
|
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{fonts,}
|
|
|
|
% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
|
|
% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
|
|
% italics, not bold italics.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\setfontstyle#1{%
|
|
\def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
|
|
\csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
|
|
|
|
\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
|
|
\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
|
|
\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
|
|
\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
|
|
\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
|
|
|
|
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
|
% So we set up a \sf.
|
|
\newfam\sffam
|
|
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
|
|
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
|
|
|
|
% We don't need math for this font style.
|
|
\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
|
|
|
|
% Default leading.
|
|
\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
|
|
|
|
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
|
% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
|
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
|
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
|
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\setleading#1{%
|
|
\normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
|
|
\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
|
\normalbaselines
|
|
\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
|
\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
|
depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
|
|
% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
|
|
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
|
|
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
|
|
|
|
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
|
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
|
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
|
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
|
|
\def\fontprefix{cm}
|
|
\fi
|
|
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
|
\def\rmshape{r}
|
|
\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
|
|
\def\bfshape{b}
|
|
\def\bxshape{bx}
|
|
\def\ttshape{tt}
|
|
\def\ttbshape{tt}
|
|
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
|
\def\itshape{ti}
|
|
\def\itbshape{bxti}
|
|
\def\slshape{sl}
|
|
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
|
\def\sfshape{ss}
|
|
\def\sfbshape{ss}
|
|
\def\scshape{csc}
|
|
\def\scbshape{csc}
|
|
|
|
% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
|
|
\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
|
|
\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
|
|
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
|
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
|
|
|
% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
|
\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
|
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
|
|
|
|
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
|
\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
|
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
|
|
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
|
|
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
|
|
\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
|
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
|
|
|
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
|
\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
|
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
|
|
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
|
|
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
|
|
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
|
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
|
|
|
% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
|
\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
|
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
|
|
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
|
|
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
|
|
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
|
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
|
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
|
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
|
\def\authorrm{\secrm}
|
|
\def\authortt{\sectt}
|
|
|
|
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
|
\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
|
|
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
|
|
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
|
|
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
|
|
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
|
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
|
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
|
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
|
|
|
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
|
\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
|
|
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
|
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
|
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
|
\let\secbf\secrm
|
|
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
|
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
|
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
|
|
|
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
|
\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
|
|
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
|
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
|
|
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
|
|
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
|
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
|
|
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
|
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
|
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}
|
|
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
|
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
|
|
|
% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
|
|
\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
|
|
\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}
|
|
\font\reducedi=cmmi10
|
|
\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
|
|
|
|
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
|
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
|
|
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
|
|
% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
|
|
% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\resetmathfonts{%
|
|
\textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
|
|
\textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
|
|
\textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
|
|
% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
|
|
% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
|
|
% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
|
|
%
|
|
% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
|
|
% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
|
|
% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
|
|
%
|
|
% This all needs generalizing, badly.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\textfonts{%
|
|
\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
|
|
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
|
|
\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\textttsl
|
|
\def\curfontsize{text}%
|
|
\def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
|
|
\def\titlefonts{%
|
|
\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
|
|
\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
|
|
\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
|
|
\def\curfontsize{title}%
|
|
\def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
|
|
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
|
|
\def\chapfonts{%
|
|
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
|
|
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
|
|
\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
|
|
\def\curfontsize{chap}%
|
|
\def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
|
|
\def\secfonts{%
|
|
\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
|
|
\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
|
|
\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\secttsl
|
|
\def\curfontsize{sec}%
|
|
\def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
|
|
\def\subsecfonts{%
|
|
\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
|
|
\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
|
|
\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
|
|
\def\curfontsize{ssec}%
|
|
\def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
|
|
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
|
|
\def\reducedfonts{%
|
|
\let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
|
|
\let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
|
|
\let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
|
|
\def\curfontsize{reduced}%
|
|
\def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
|
\def\smallfonts{%
|
|
\let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
|
|
\let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
|
|
\let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
|
|
\def\curfontsize{small}%
|
|
\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
|
\def\smallerfonts{%
|
|
\let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
|
|
\let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
|
|
\let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
|
|
\def\curfontsize{smaller}%
|
|
\def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
|
|
|
|
% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
|
|
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
|
|
|
|
% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
|
|
% can fit this many characters:
|
|
% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
|
|
% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
|
|
% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
|
|
% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
|
|
% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
|
|
%
|
|
% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
|
|
% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
|
|
%
|
|
% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
|
|
% --karl, 24jan03.
|
|
|
|
|
|
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
|
%
|
|
\textfonts \rm
|
|
|
|
% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
|
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
|
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
|
|
|
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
|
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
|
|
|
% Fonts for short table of contents.
|
|
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} % no cmb12
|
|
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
|
|
\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
|
|
|
|
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
|
|
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
|
|
|
|
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
|
|
% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
|
|
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
|
|
\ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
|
|
\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
|
\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
|
|
|
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
|
|
% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
|
|
\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
|
|
|
% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
|
|
% ttsl for book titles, do we?
|
|
\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
|
|
|
\let\i=\smartitalic
|
|
\let\slanted=\smartslanted
|
|
\let\var=\smartslanted
|
|
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
|
|
\let\emph=\smartitalic
|
|
|
|
% @b, explicit bold.
|
|
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
|
\let\strong=\b
|
|
|
|
% @sansserif, explicit sans.
|
|
\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
|
|
|
|
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
|
% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
|
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
|
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
|
|
|
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
|
% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
|
|
% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
|
|
%
|
|
\chardef\colonChar = `\:
|
|
\chardef\commaChar = `\,
|
|
\chardef\dotChar = `\.
|
|
\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
|
|
\chardef\questChar = `\?
|
|
\chardef\semiChar = `\;
|
|
%
|
|
\catcode`@=11
|
|
\def\plainfrenchspacing{%
|
|
\sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
|
|
\sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
|
|
}
|
|
\def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
|
|
\sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
|
|
\sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
|
|
}
|
|
\catcode`@=\other
|
|
\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
|
|
|
|
\def\t#1{%
|
|
{\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
|
\null
|
|
}
|
|
\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
|
|
\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
|
|
\font\keysy=cmsy9
|
|
\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
|
\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
|
\vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
|
\hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
|
\kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
|
\kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
|
% The old definition, with no lozenge:
|
|
%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
|
|
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
|
|
|
|
% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
|
|
\let\file=\samp
|
|
\let\option=\samp
|
|
|
|
% @code is a modification of @t,
|
|
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
|
|
\def\tclose#1{%
|
|
{%
|
|
% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
|
\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
|
%
|
|
% Switch to typewriter.
|
|
\tt
|
|
%
|
|
% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
|
\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Turn off hyphenation.
|
|
\nohyphenation
|
|
%
|
|
\rawbackslash
|
|
\plainfrenchspacing
|
|
#1%
|
|
}%
|
|
\null
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
|
|
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
|
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
|
|
|
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
|
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
|
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
|
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
|
|
% -- rms.
|
|
{
|
|
\catcode`\-=\active
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
|
%
|
|
\global\def\code{\begingroup
|
|
\catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
|
|
\ifallowcodebreaks
|
|
\let-\codedash
|
|
\let_\codeunder
|
|
\else
|
|
\let-\realdash
|
|
\let_\realunder
|
|
\fi
|
|
\codex
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\realdash{-}
|
|
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
|
|
\def\codeunder{%
|
|
% this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
|
|
% is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
|
|
% will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
|
|
% (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
|
|
\ifusingtt{\ifmmode
|
|
\mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
|
|
\else\normalunderscore \fi
|
|
\discretionary{}{}{}}%
|
|
{\_}%
|
|
}
|
|
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
|
|
|
% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
|
|
% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
|
|
% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
|
|
% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
|
|
%
|
|
\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
|
|
|
|
\def\keywordtrue{true}
|
|
\def\keywordfalse{false}
|
|
|
|
\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
|
|
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
|
|
\allowcodebreakstrue
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
|
|
\allowcodebreaksfalse
|
|
\else
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
|
% then @kbd has no effect.
|
|
|
|
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
|
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
|
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
|
\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
|
|
\def\txiarg{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
|
\else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
|
\errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
|
}
|
|
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
|
\def\wordexample{example}
|
|
\def\wordcode{code}
|
|
|
|
% Default is `distinct.'
|
|
\kbdinputstyle distinct
|
|
|
|
\def\xkey{\key}
|
|
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
|
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
|
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
|
|
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
|
|
|
|
% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
|
|
\let\indicateurl=\code
|
|
\let\env=\code
|
|
\let\command=\code
|
|
|
|
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
|
|
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
|
|
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
|
|
% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
|
|
% a hypertex \special here.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
|
|
\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
|
\pdfurl{#1}%
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|
\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
|
|
\else
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|
\unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
|
|
\else
|
|
\unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
\code{#1}% only url given, so show it
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\endlink
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|
|
|
% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
|
|
%
|
|
\let\url=\uref
|
|
|
|
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
|
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
|
|
%
|
|
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|
\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
|
|
\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
|
\pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
|
\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
|
|
\endlink
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|
\else
|
|
\let\email=\uref
|
|
\fi
|
|
|
|
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
|
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
|
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
|
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
|
|
|
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
|
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
|
|
|
\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
|
|
|
|
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
|
|
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
|
|
% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
|
|
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
|
|
|
|
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
|
|
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
|
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
|
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
|
|
|
% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
|
|
% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
|
|
% all-uppercase.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
|
|
\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
|
{\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
|
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
|
|
% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
|
|
\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
|
{\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
|
\space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
|
|
|
|
% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
|
|
% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
|
|
% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
|
|
% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
|
|
% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
|
|
%
|
|
% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
|
|
% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
|
|
% font height.
|
|
%
|
|
% feymr - regular
|
|
% feymo - slanted
|
|
% feybr - bold
|
|
% feybo - bold slanted
|
|
%
|
|
% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
|
|
% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
|
|
% Hmm.
|
|
%
|
|
% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
|
|
% Hope not.
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
|
|
\def\eurofont{%
|
|
% We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
|
|
% \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
|
|
% installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
|
|
% font installed.
|
|
%
|
|
% There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
|
|
% that to the current nominal size.
|
|
%
|
|
% By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
|
|
% does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
|
%
|
|
\ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
|
% bold:
|
|
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
|
|
\else
|
|
% regular:
|
|
\font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
|
|
\fi
|
|
\thiseurofont
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
|
|
% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
|
|
% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\registeredsymbol{%
|
|
$^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
|
|
\hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
|
|
}$%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
|
|
% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
|
|
% so we'll define it if necessary.
|
|
%
|
|
\ifx\Orb\undefined
|
|
\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
|
|
\fi
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{page headings,}
|
|
|
|
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
|
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
|
|
|
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
|
\newif\ifseenauthor
|
|
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
|
|
|
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
|
|
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
|
|
%
|
|
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|
\let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
|
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|
\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
|
|
|
\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
|
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
|
|
|
\envdef\titlepage{%
|
|
% Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
|
% Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
|
\vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
|
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
|
%
|
|
% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
|
% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
|
\let\oldpage = \page
|
|
\def\page{%
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
|
\finishtitlepage
|
|
\fi
|
|
\let\page = \oldpage
|
|
\page
|
|
\null
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\Etitlepage{%
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
|
\finishtitlepage
|
|
\fi
|
|
% It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
|
% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
|
% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
|
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
|
\oldpage
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
%
|
|
% Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
|
|
% in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
|
|
\HEADINGSon
|
|
%
|
|
% If they want short, they certainly want long too.
|
|
\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|
\shortcontents
|
|
\contents
|
|
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
|
\global\let\contents = \relax
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
|
\contents
|
|
\global\let\contents = \relax
|
|
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\finishtitlepage{%
|
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
|
\vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
|
|
|
|
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
|
|
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
|
|
|
|
\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
|
|
\let\tt=\authortt}
|
|
|
|
\parseargdef\title{%
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
|
\leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
|
|
% print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
|
\finishedtitlepagefalse
|
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\parseargdef\subtitle{%
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
|
{\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
|
% It can also be used inside @quotation.
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\author{%
|
|
\def\temp{\quotation}%
|
|
\ifx\thisenv\temp
|
|
\def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
|
|
\else
|
|
\checkenv\titlepage
|
|
\ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
|
|
{\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
%%% Set up page headings and footings.
|
|
|
|
\let\thispage=\folio
|
|
|
|
\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
|
|
\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
|
|
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
|
|
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
|
|
|
|
% Now make TeX use those variables
|
|
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
|
|
\else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
|
|
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
|
\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
|
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
|
|
|
% Commands to set those variables.
|
|
% For example, this is what @headings on does
|
|
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
|
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
|
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
|
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
|
|
|
|
|
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
|
\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|
\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|
|
|
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
|
\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|
\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|
|
|
\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
|
|
|
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
|
\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|
\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
|
|
|
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
|
\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
|
\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
|
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
|
% @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
|
\global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
|
|
\global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
|
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
|
% @headings off turns them off.
|
|
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
|
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
|
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
|
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
|
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
|
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
|
|
|
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
|
\def\HEADINGSoff{%
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
|
|
\HEADINGSoff
|
|
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
|
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
|
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
|
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
|
% edge of all pages.
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
|
|
\global\pageno=1
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|
}
|
|
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
|
|
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
|
% page number on top right.
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
|
|
\global\pageno=1
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
}
|
|
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
|
|
|
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
|
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Subroutines used in generating headings
|
|
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
|
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
|
|
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
|
|
\ifx\today\undefined
|
|
\def\today{%
|
|
\number\day\space
|
|
\ifcase\month
|
|
\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
|
|
\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
|
|
\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
|
|
\fi
|
|
\space\number\year}
|
|
\fi
|
|
|
|
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
|
|
% It generates no output of its own.
|
|
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
|
|
\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{tables,}
|
|
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
|
|
|
|
% default indentation of table text
|
|
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
|
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
|
\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
|
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
|
\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
|
|
|
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
|
\newdimen\itemmax
|
|
|
|
% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
|
% these defs.
|
|
% They also define \itemindex
|
|
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
|
|
|
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
|
|
|
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
|
|
|
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
|
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
|
|
|
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
|
|
\itemindex{#1}%
|
|
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
|
%
|
|
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
|
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
|
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
|
% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
|
% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
|
\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
|
%
|
|
% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
|
% but leave it ragged-right.
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
|
\advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
|
\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
|
|
\leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
%
|
|
% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
|
% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
|
\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
|
%
|
|
% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
|
|
% what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
|
|
% \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
|
|
% cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
|
|
% bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
|
|
% \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
|
|
%
|
|
\penalty 10001
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
|
\else
|
|
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
|
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
|
|
\noindent
|
|
% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
|
|
% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
|
|
% eventually be printed.
|
|
\nobreak\kern-\tableindent
|
|
\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
|
|
\unhbox0
|
|
\nobreak\kern\dimen0
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
|
|
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
|
|
|
|
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
|
|
\envdef\table{%
|
|
\let\itemindex\gobble
|
|
\tablecheck{table}%
|
|
}
|
|
\envdef\ftable{%
|
|
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
|
|
\tablecheck{ftable}%
|
|
}
|
|
\envdef\vtable{%
|
|
\def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
|
|
\tablecheck{vtable}%
|
|
}
|
|
\def\tablecheck#1{%
|
|
\ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
|
|
that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
|
\def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\let\next\tablex
|
|
\fi
|
|
\next
|
|
}
|
|
\def\tablex#1{%
|
|
\def\itemindicate{#1}%
|
|
\parsearg\tabley
|
|
}
|
|
\def\tabley#1{%
|
|
{%
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
|
|
\expandafter
|
|
}\temp \endtablez
|
|
}
|
|
\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
|
\ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
|
|
\ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
|
|
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
|
|
\itemmax=\tableindent
|
|
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent
|
|
\exdentamount=\tableindent
|
|
\parindent = 0pt
|
|
\parskip = \smallskipamount
|
|
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
|
\let\item = \internalBitem
|
|
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx
|
|
}
|
|
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
|
|
\let\Eftable\Etable
|
|
\let\Evtable\Etable
|
|
\let\Eitemize\Etable
|
|
\let\Eenumerate\Etable
|
|
|
|
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
|
|
|
\newcount \itemno
|
|
|
|
\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
|
|
|
|
\def\doitemize#1{%
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
|
\itemmax=\itemindent
|
|
\advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
|
|
\exdentamount=\itemindent
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
|
\parskip=\smallskipamount
|
|
\ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
|
\def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
|
% @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
|
|
\ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
|
|
\let\item=\itemizeitem
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\itemizeitem{%
|
|
\advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
|
|
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
|
|
{%
|
|
% If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
|
|
% \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
|
|
% done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
|
|
% parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
|
|
% other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
|
|
% usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
|
|
% space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
|
|
% that's the theory.
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
|
|
\noindent
|
|
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
|
|
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
|
|
\flushcr
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
|
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
|
|
|
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
|
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
|
% argument is the same as `1'.
|
|
%
|
|
\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
|
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
|
% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
|
\def\thearg{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
|
% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
|
% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
|
% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
|
% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
|
\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
|
\ifx\rest\empty
|
|
% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
|
% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
|
% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
|
% not equal to itself.
|
|
% Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
|
%
|
|
% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
|
% continuing to look for a <number>.
|
|
%
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
|
\numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
|
\else
|
|
% It's a letter.
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
|
\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
|
\else
|
|
\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
|
\numericenumerate
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
|
% given in \thearg.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\numericenumerate{%
|
|
\itemno = \thearg
|
|
\startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
|
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
|
\startenumeration{%
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
|
\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
|
alphabet}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\char\lccode\itemno
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
|
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
|
\startenumeration{%
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
|
\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
|
alphabet}
|
|
\fi
|
|
\char\uccode\itemno
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
|
% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
|
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\startenumeration#1{%
|
|
\advance\itemno by -1
|
|
\doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
|
% to @enumerate.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
|
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
|
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
|
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @multitable macros
|
|
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
|
%
|
|
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
|
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
|
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
|
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
|
|
|
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
|
|
|
% To make preamble:
|
|
%
|
|
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
|
% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
|
% @item ...
|
|
%
|
|
% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
|
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
|
% columns as desired.
|
|
|
|
|
|
% Or use a template:
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
|
% @item ...
|
|
% using the widest term desired in each column.
|
|
|
|
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
|
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
|
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
|
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
|
|
|
% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
|
|
% if they are.
|
|
|
|
% Sample multitable:
|
|
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
|
% @item
|
|
% first col stuff
|
|
% @tab
|
|
% second col stuff
|
|
% @tab
|
|
% third col
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
|
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
|
%
|
|
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
|
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
|
% @end multitable
|
|
|
|
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
|
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
|
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
|
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
|
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
|
% to baseline.
|
|
% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
|
%
|
|
\newskip\multitableparskip
|
|
\newskip\multitableparindent
|
|
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
|
\newskip\multitablelinespace
|
|
\multitableparskip=0pt
|
|
\multitableparindent=6pt
|
|
\multitablecolspace=12pt
|
|
\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
|
|
|
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
|
%
|
|
\let\endsetuptable\relax
|
|
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
|
\let\columnfractions\relax
|
|
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
|
\newif\ifsetpercent
|
|
|
|
% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
|
|
% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
|
|
\setuptable
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\newcount\colcount
|
|
\def\setuptable#1{%
|
|
\def\firstarg{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
|
|
\let\go = \relax
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
|
|
\global\setpercenttrue
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifsetpercent
|
|
\let\go\pickupwholefraction
|
|
\else
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
|
|
% separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
|
|
% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
|
|
% we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
|
|
\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\let\go = \setuptable
|
|
\fi%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\go
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% multitable-only commands.
|
|
%
|
|
% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
|
|
% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
|
|
% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
|
|
\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
|
|
%
|
|
% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
|
|
% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
|
|
% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
|
|
% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
|
|
\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
|
|
|
|
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
|
%
|
|
\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
|
|
%
|
|
\envdef\multitable{%
|
|
\vskip\parskip
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
|
%
|
|
% @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
|
|
% We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
|
|
% contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
|
|
% \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
|
|
\def\item{\crcr}%
|
|
%
|
|
\tolerance=9500
|
|
\hbadness=9500
|
|
\setmultitablespacing
|
|
\parskip=\multitableparskip
|
|
\parindent=\multitableparindent
|
|
\overfullrule=0pt
|
|
\global\colcount=0
|
|
%
|
|
\everycr = {%
|
|
\noalign{%
|
|
\global\everytab={}%
|
|
\global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
|
|
% Check for saved footnotes, etc.
|
|
\checkinserts
|
|
% Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
|
|
%\filbreak
|
|
% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
|
|
% table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
|
|
% problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
|
|
}%
|
|
}%
|
|
%
|
|
\parsearg\domultitable
|
|
}
|
|
\def\domultitable#1{%
|
|
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
|
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
|
%
|
|
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
|
% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
|
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
|
% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
|
\halign\bgroup &%
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
|
\multistrut
|
|
\vtop{%
|
|
% Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
|
|
\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
|
%
|
|
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
|
% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
|
% the first one.
|
|
%
|
|
% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
|
% to the width of each template entry.
|
|
%
|
|
% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
|
% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
|
% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
|
% left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
|
%
|
|
% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
|
\rightskip=0pt
|
|
\ifnum\colcount=1
|
|
% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
|
\advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifsetpercent \else
|
|
% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
|
% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
|
\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
|
\fi
|
|
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
|
\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
|
\fi
|
|
% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
|
% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
|
% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
|
% For example:
|
|
% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
|
% @item @code{#}
|
|
% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
|
% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
|
|
% marking characters.
|
|
\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
|
|
}\cr
|
|
}
|
|
\def\Emultitable{%
|
|
\crcr
|
|
\egroup % end the \halign
|
|
\global\setpercentfalse
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\setmultitablespacing{%
|
|
\def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
|
|
%
|
|
% Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
|
|
% \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
|
|
% this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
|
|
% See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
|
|
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
|
|
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
|
|
\fi
|
|
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
|
%% table. If not, do nothing.
|
|
%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
|
%% than skip between lines in the table.
|
|
\fi%
|
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
|
%% than skip between lines in the table.
|
|
\fi}
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{conditionals,}
|
|
|
|
% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
|
|
% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
|
|
% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
|
|
% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
|
|
% attempt to close an environment group.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\makecond#1{%
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
|
|
}
|
|
\makecond{iftex}
|
|
\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
|
|
\makecond{ifnothtml}
|
|
\makecond{ifnotinfo}
|
|
\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
|
|
\makecond{ifnotxml}
|
|
|
|
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
|
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
|
|
\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
|
|
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
|
\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
|
|
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
|
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
|
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
|
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
|
|
\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
|
|
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
|
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
|
\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
|
|
|
|
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
|
|
%
|
|
% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
|
|
\newcount\doignorecount
|
|
|
|
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
|
% Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
|
|
\obeylines
|
|
\catcode`\@ = \other
|
|
\catcode`\{ = \other
|
|
\catcode`\} = \other
|
|
%
|
|
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
|
\spaceisspace
|
|
%
|
|
% Count number of #1's that we've seen.
|
|
\doignorecount = 0
|
|
%
|
|
% Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
|
|
\dodoignore{#1}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
|
|
\obeylines %
|
|
%
|
|
\gdef\dodoignore#1{%
|
|
% #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
|
|
%
|
|
% Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
|
|
\long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
|
|
\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
|
|
%
|
|
% And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
|
|
% line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
|
|
% example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
|
|
\long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
|
|
%
|
|
% And now expand that command.
|
|
\doignoretext ^^M%
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
|
|
\let\next\doignoretextzzz
|
|
\else % Found a nested condition, ...
|
|
\advance\doignorecount by 1
|
|
\let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
|
|
% If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
|
|
\fi
|
|
\next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
|
|
%
|
|
\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
|
|
\ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
|
|
\let\next\enddoignore
|
|
\else % Still inside a nested condition.
|
|
\advance\doignorecount by -1
|
|
\let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
|
|
\fi
|
|
\next
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Finish off ignored text.
|
|
{ \obeylines%
|
|
% Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
|
|
% environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
|
|
% would result in a blank line in the output.
|
|
\gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
|
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
|
%
|
|
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
|
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
|
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
|
% didn't need it.
|
|
% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
|
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
|
{%
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
|
\edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty
|
|
\next{}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\setzzz#2\endsetzzz
|
|
\fi
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
|
\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
|
|
|
|
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\clear{%
|
|
{%
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|
\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
|
\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
|
|
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
|
|
{
|
|
\catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
|
|
%
|
|
\gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
|
|
\let\value = \expandablevalue
|
|
% We don't want these characters active, ...
|
|
\catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
|
|
% ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
|
|
% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
|
|
% So \let them to their normal equivalents.
|
|
\let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
|
|
% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
|
|
% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
|
|
% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
|
|
% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
|
|
% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
|
|
% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
|
{[No value for ``#1'']}%
|
|
\message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\csname SET#1\endcsname
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
|
% with @set.
|
|
%
|
|
% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
|
|
%
|
|
\makecond{ifset}
|
|
\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
|
|
\def\doifset#1#2{%
|
|
{%
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|
\let\next=\empty
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
|
|
#1% If not set, redefine \next.
|
|
\fi
|
|
\expandafter
|
|
}\next
|
|
}
|
|
\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
|
|
|
|
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
|
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
|
%
|
|
% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
|
|
% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
|
|
% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
|
|
%
|
|
\makecond{ifclear}
|
|
\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
|
|
\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
|
|
|
|
% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
|
% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
|
\let\dircategory=\comment
|
|
|
|
% @defininfoenclose.
|
|
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{indexing,}
|
|
% Index generation facilities
|
|
|
|
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
|
% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
|
|
\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
|
|
|
|
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
|
|
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
|
|
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
|
|
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
|
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
|
|
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
|
% for the sake of vms.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\newindex#1{%
|
|
\iflinks
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
|
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
|
|
\fi
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
|
|
\noexpand\doindex{#1}}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
|
|
|
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
|
|
\iflinks
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
|
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
|
|
\fi
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
|
|
\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
|
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
|
%
|
|
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
|
% inside @code.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
|
|
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
|
|
|
|
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
|
|
% #3 the target index (bar).
|
|
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
|
|
% Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
|
|
% closing the target index.
|
|
\expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
|
|
% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
|
|
% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
|
|
\expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
|
|
\fi
|
|
% redefine \fooindfile:
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
|
|
% redefine \fooindex:
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
|
|
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
|
% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
|
|
|
|
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
|
|
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
|
|
|
|
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
|
|
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
|
|
|
|
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
|
|
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
|
|
|
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
|
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
|
|
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
|
|
|
|
% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
|
|
% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
|
|
% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\indexdummies{%
|
|
\escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
|
|
\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
|
|
\def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
|
|
% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
|
|
% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
|
|
% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
|
|
\let\{ = \mylbrace
|
|
\let\} = \myrbrace
|
|
%
|
|
% Do the redefinitions.
|
|
\commondummies
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
|
|
% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
|
|
% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
|
|
% this will be simpler.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\atdummies{%
|
|
\def\@{@@}%
|
|
\def\ {@ }%
|
|
\let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
|
|
\let\} = \rbraceatcmd
|
|
%
|
|
% Do the redefinitions.
|
|
\commondummies
|
|
\otherbackslash
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\commondummies{%
|
|
%
|
|
% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
|
|
% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words,
|
|
% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
|
|
% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
|
|
% from whatever follows.
|
|
%
|
|
% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
|
|
% space.
|
|
%
|
|
% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
|
|
% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
|
|
% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
|
|
\def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
|
|
\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
|
|
%
|
|
\commondummiesnofonts
|
|
%
|
|
\definedummyletter\_%
|
|
%
|
|
% Non-English letters.
|
|
\definedummyword\AA
|
|
\definedummyword\AE
|
|
\definedummyword\L
|
|
\definedummyword\OE
|
|
\definedummyword\O
|
|
\definedummyword\aa
|
|
\definedummyword\ae
|
|
\definedummyword\l
|
|
\definedummyword\oe
|
|
\definedummyword\o
|
|
\definedummyword\ss
|
|
\definedummyword\exclamdown
|
|
\definedummyword\questiondown
|
|
\definedummyword\ordf
|
|
\definedummyword\ordm
|
|
%
|
|
% Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
|
|
\definedummyword\bf
|
|
\definedummyword\gtr
|
|
\definedummyword\hat
|
|
\definedummyword\less
|
|
\definedummyword\sf
|
|
\definedummyword\sl
|
|
\definedummyword\tclose
|
|
\definedummyword\tt
|
|
%
|
|
\definedummyword\LaTeX
|
|
\definedummyword\TeX
|
|
%
|
|
% Assorted special characters.
|
|
\definedummyword\bullet
|
|
\definedummyword\comma
|
|
\definedummyword\copyright
|
|
\definedummyword\registeredsymbol
|
|
\definedummyword\dots
|
|
\definedummyword\enddots
|
|
\definedummyword\equiv
|
|
\definedummyword\error
|
|
\definedummyword\euro
|
|
\definedummyword\expansion
|
|
\definedummyword\minus
|
|
\definedummyword\pounds
|
|
\definedummyword\point
|
|
\definedummyword\print
|
|
\definedummyword\result
|
|
%
|
|
% We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
|
|
\macrolist
|
|
%
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
|
%
|
|
% Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
|
|
% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
|
|
% Control letters and accents.
|
|
\definedummyletter\!%
|
|
\definedummyaccent\"%
|
|
\definedummyaccent\'%
|
|
\definedummyletter\*%
|
|
\definedummyaccent\,%
|
|
\definedummyletter\.%
|
|
\definedummyletter\/%
|
|
\definedummyletter\:%
|
|
\definedummyaccent\=%
|
|
\definedummyletter\?%
|
|
\definedummyaccent\^%
|
|
\definedummyaccent\`%
|
|
\definedummyaccent\~%
|
|
\definedummyword\u
|
|
\definedummyword\v
|
|
\definedummyword\H
|
|
\definedummyword\dotaccent
|
|
\definedummyword\ringaccent
|
|
\definedummyword\tieaccent
|
|
\definedummyword\ubaraccent
|
|
\definedummyword\udotaccent
|
|
\definedummyword\dotless
|
|
%
|
|
% Texinfo font commands.
|
|
\definedummyword\b
|
|
\definedummyword\i
|
|
\definedummyword\r
|
|
\definedummyword\sc
|
|
\definedummyword\t
|
|
%
|
|
% Commands that take arguments.
|
|
\definedummyword\acronym
|
|
\definedummyword\cite
|
|
\definedummyword\code
|
|
\definedummyword\command
|
|
\definedummyword\dfn
|
|
\definedummyword\emph
|
|
\definedummyword\env
|
|
\definedummyword\file
|
|
\definedummyword\kbd
|
|
\definedummyword\key
|
|
\definedummyword\math
|
|
\definedummyword\option
|
|
\definedummyword\pxref
|
|
\definedummyword\ref
|
|
\definedummyword\samp
|
|
\definedummyword\strong
|
|
\definedummyword\tie
|
|
\definedummyword\uref
|
|
\definedummyword\url
|
|
\definedummyword\var
|
|
\definedummyword\verb
|
|
\definedummyword\w
|
|
\definedummyword\xref
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
|
|
% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
|
|
% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
|
|
% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\indexnofonts{%
|
|
% Accent commands should become @asis.
|
|
\def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
|
|
% We can just ignore other control letters.
|
|
\def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
|
|
% Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
|
|
\let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
|
|
%
|
|
\commondummiesnofonts
|
|
%
|
|
% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
|
% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
|
|
% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
|
|
%\let\tt=\asis
|
|
%
|
|
\def\ { }%
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
|
% how to handle braces?
|
|
\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Non-English letters.
|
|
\def\AA{AA}%
|
|
\def\AE{AE}%
|
|
\def\L{L}%
|
|
\def\OE{OE}%
|
|
\def\O{O}%
|
|
\def\aa{aa}%
|
|
\def\ae{ae}%
|
|
\def\l{l}%
|
|
\def\oe{oe}%
|
|
\def\o{o}%
|
|
\def\ss{ss}%
|
|
\def\exclamdown{!}%
|
|
\def\questiondown{?}%
|
|
\def\ordf{a}%
|
|
\def\ordm{o}%
|
|
%
|
|
\def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
|
|
\def\TeX{TeX}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Assorted special characters.
|
|
% (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
|
|
\def\bullet{bullet}%
|
|
\def\comma{,}%
|
|
\def\copyright{copyright}%
|
|
\def\registeredsymbol{R}%
|
|
\def\dots{...}%
|
|
\def\enddots{...}%
|
|
\def\equiv{==}%
|
|
\def\error{error}%
|
|
\def\euro{euro}%
|
|
\def\expansion{==>}%
|
|
\def\minus{-}%
|
|
\def\pounds{pounds}%
|
|
\def\point{.}%
|
|
\def\print{-|}%
|
|
\def\result{=>}%
|
|
%
|
|
% We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
|
|
% Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
|
|
% makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
|
|
% writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
|
|
% that starts with \.
|
|
%
|
|
% Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
|
|
% to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
|
|
% goes to end-of-line is not handled.
|
|
%
|
|
\macrolist
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
|
|
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
|
|
|
|
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
|
|
% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
|
|
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
|
|
|
|
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
|
|
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
|
|
% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
|
|
% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
|
|
\iflinks
|
|
{%
|
|
% Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
|
|
\toks0 = {#2}%
|
|
% If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
|
|
\def\thirdarg{#3}%
|
|
\ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
|
|
%
|
|
\ifvmode
|
|
\dosubindsanitize
|
|
\else
|
|
\dosubindwrite
|
|
\fi
|
|
}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
|
|
%
|
|
\def\dosubindwrite{%
|
|
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
|
|
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
|
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Remember, we are within a group.
|
|
\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
|
|
\def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
|
|
% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
|
|
%
|
|
% Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
|
|
% get the string to sort by.
|
|
{\indexnofonts
|
|
\edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
|
|
\xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
|
|
}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
|
|
% the original text, including any font commands. We write
|
|
% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
|
|
% subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
|
|
% sorted result.
|
|
\edef\temp{%
|
|
\write\writeto{%
|
|
\string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\temp
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Take care of unwanted page breaks:
|
|
%
|
|
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
|
|
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
|
|
% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
|
|
% \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
|
|
% like this:
|
|
% @end defun
|
|
% @tindex whatever
|
|
% @defun ...
|
|
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
|
|
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
|
|
% the previous defun.
|
|
%
|
|
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
|
|
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
|
|
%
|
|
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
|
|
%
|
|
% But wait, there is a catch there:
|
|
% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
|
|
% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
|
|
% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
|
|
% representation of the skip.
|
|
%
|
|
% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
|
|
% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
|
|
%
|
|
\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
|
|
%
|
|
% ..., ready, GO:
|
|
%
|
|
\def\dosubindsanitize{%
|
|
% \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
|
|
\skip0 = \lastskip
|
|
\edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
|
|
\count255 = \lastpenalty
|
|
%
|
|
% If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
|
|
% skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
|
|
% -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a
|
|
% non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
|
|
% breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
|
|
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
|
\else
|
|
\vskip-\skip0
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\dosubindwrite
|
|
%
|
|
\ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
|
% If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
|
|
% perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
|
|
% to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
|
|
% signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
|
|
% following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
|
|
%
|
|
% @deffn deffn-whatever
|
|
% @vindex index-whatever
|
|
% Description.
|
|
% would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
|
|
% and the "Description." paragraph.
|
|
\ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi
|
|
\else
|
|
% On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
|
|
% this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
|
|
% (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
|
|
\nobreak\vskip\skip0
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
|
% or
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
|
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
|
% containing these kinds of lines:
|
|
% \initial {c}
|
|
% before the first topic whose initial is c
|
|
% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
|
% for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
|
% \primary {topic}
|
|
% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
|
% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
|
% for each subtopic.
|
|
|
|
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
|
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
|
|
|
\def\findex {\fnindex}
|
|
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
|
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
|
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
|
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
|
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
|
|
|
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
|
|
{\obeylines %
|
|
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
|
|
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
|
|
|
|
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
|
|
|
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
|
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
|
|
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
|
%
|
|
\smallfonts \rm
|
|
\tolerance = 9500
|
|
\everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
|
|
%
|
|
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
|
% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
|
|
% \initial {@}
|
|
% as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
|
|
% (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
|
|
\catcode`\@ = 11
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.#1s
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
|
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
|
% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
|
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
|
% there is some text.
|
|
\putwordIndexNonexistent
|
|
\else
|
|
%
|
|
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
|
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
|
% it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
|
\read 1 to \temp
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
|
\putwordIndexIsEmpty
|
|
\else
|
|
% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
|
|
% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
|
|
% to make right now.
|
|
\def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
|
|
\catcode`\\ = 0
|
|
\escapechar = `\\
|
|
\begindoublecolumns
|
|
\input \jobname.#1s
|
|
\enddoublecolumns
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\closein 1
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|
|
|
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
|
|
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
|
|
|
|
\def\initial#1{{%
|
|
% Some minor font changes for the special characters.
|
|
\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
|
|
%
|
|
% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
|
|
\removelastskip
|
|
%
|
|
% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
|
|
\nobreak
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
|
|
\penalty 0
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
|
|
%
|
|
% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
|
|
% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
|
|
% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
|
|
% we need before each entry, but it's better.
|
|
%
|
|
% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
|
|
\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
|
|
\leftline{\secbf #1}%
|
|
% Do our best not to break after the initial.
|
|
\nobreak
|
|
\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
|
|
% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
|
|
% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
|
|
%
|
|
% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
|
|
% \def\entry#1#2{...
|
|
% But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
|
|
% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
|
|
% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
|
|
%
|
|
% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
|
|
% --kasal, 21nov03
|
|
\def\entry{%
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
%
|
|
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
|
|
% affect previous text.
|
|
\par
|
|
%
|
|
% Do not fill out the last line with white space.
|
|
\parfillskip = 0in
|
|
%
|
|
% No extra space above this paragraph.
|
|
\parskip = 0in
|
|
%
|
|
% Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
|
|
\finalhyphendemerits = 0
|
|
%
|
|
% \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
|
|
% don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
|
|
% dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
|
|
% indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
|
|
% lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
|
|
%
|
|
% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
|
|
% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
|
|
\hangindent = 2em
|
|
%
|
|
% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
|
|
% with blank space.
|
|
\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
|
|
%
|
|
% A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
|
|
% columns.
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus1pt
|
|
%
|
|
% Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
|
|
\afterassignment\doentry
|
|
\let\temp =
|
|
}
|
|
\def\doentry{%
|
|
\bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
|
|
\noindent
|
|
\aftergroup\finishentry
|
|
% And now comes the text of the entry.
|
|
}
|
|
\def\finishentry#1{%
|
|
% #1 is the page number.
|
|
%
|
|
% The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
|
|
% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
|
|
% cursed by a Unix daemon.
|
|
\def\tempa{{\rm }}%
|
|
\def\tempb{#1}%
|
|
\edef\tempc{\tempa}%
|
|
\edef\tempd{\tempb}%
|
|
\ifx\tempc\tempd
|
|
\ %
|
|
\else
|
|
%
|
|
% If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
|
|
% this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
|
|
% fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
|
|
\hfil\penalty50
|
|
\null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
|
|
%
|
|
% The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
|
|
% part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
|
|
% \hbox ensues.
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|
\pdfgettoks#1.%
|
|
\ \the\toksA
|
|
\else
|
|
\ #1%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\par
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
|
|
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
|
|
\hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
|
|
|
|
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
|
|
|
|
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
|
|
\def\secondary#1#2{{%
|
|
\parfillskip=0in
|
|
\parskip=0in
|
|
\hangindent=1in
|
|
\hangafter=1
|
|
\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|
\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
|
|
\else
|
|
#2
|
|
\fi
|
|
\par
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
|
|
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
|
|
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
|
|
\catcode`\@=11
|
|
|
|
\newbox\partialpage
|
|
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
|
|
|
|
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
|
|
% Grab any single-column material above us.
|
|
\output = {%
|
|
%
|
|
% Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
|
|
% whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
|
|
% routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
|
|
% essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
|
|
% that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
|
|
% output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
|
|
% runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
|
|
\ifvoid\partialpage \else
|
|
\onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
|
|
% Unvbox the main output page.
|
|
\unvbox\PAGE
|
|
\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
|
|
}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
|
|
%
|
|
% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
|
|
\output = {\doublecolumnout}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
|
|
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
|
|
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
|
|
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
|
|
% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
|
|
%
|
|
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
|
|
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
|
|
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
|
|
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
|
|
% as it did when we hard-coded it.
|
|
%
|
|
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
|
|
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
|
|
% been clobbered.
|
|
%
|
|
\doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
|
|
\advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
|
|
\divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
|
|
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
|
%
|
|
% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
|
|
% since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
|
|
\vsize = 2\vsize
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
|
|
% the last.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\doublecolumnout{%
|
|
\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
|
|
% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
|
|
% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
|
|
% previous page.
|
|
\dimen@ = \vsize
|
|
\divide\dimen@ by 2
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
|
|
%
|
|
% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
|
|
\setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
|
|
\onepageout\pagesofar
|
|
\unvbox255
|
|
\penalty\outputpenalty
|
|
}
|
|
%
|
|
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
|
|
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
|
|
\def\pagesofar{%
|
|
\unvbox\partialpage
|
|
%
|
|
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
|
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
|
|
\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
|
|
}
|
|
%
|
|
% All done with double columns.
|
|
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
|
|
\output = {%
|
|
% Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
|
|
% current page, no automatic page break.
|
|
\balancecolumns
|
|
%
|
|
% If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
|
|
% though, there will be another page break right after this \output
|
|
% invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
|
|
% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
|
|
% definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
|
|
% called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
|
|
% the output somewhat more palatable.)
|
|
\global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\eject
|
|
\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
|
|
%
|
|
% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
|
|
% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
|
|
% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
|
|
% \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
|
|
\pagegoal = \vsize
|
|
}
|
|
%
|
|
% Called at the end of the double column material.
|
|
\def\balancecolumns{%
|
|
\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
|
|
\dimen@ = \ht0
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by \topskip
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
|
|
\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
|
|
%debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
|
|
\splittopskip = \topskip
|
|
% Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
|
|
{%
|
|
\vbadness = 10000
|
|
\loop
|
|
\global\setbox3 = \copy0
|
|
\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
|
|
\ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
|
|
\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
|
|
\repeat
|
|
}%
|
|
%debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
|
|
\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
|
|
%
|
|
\pagesofar
|
|
}
|
|
\catcode`\@ = \other
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{sectioning,}
|
|
% Chapters, sections, etc.
|
|
|
|
% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered
|
|
% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
|
|
% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
|
|
% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
|
|
% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
|
|
\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
|
|
\newcount\chapno
|
|
\newcount\secno \secno=0
|
|
\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
|
|
\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
|
|
|
|
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
|
|
\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
|
|
%
|
|
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
|
|
% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
|
|
% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
|
|
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\appendixletter{%
|
|
\ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
|
|
% The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
|
|
% expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
|
|
% expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
|
|
% with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
|
|
\else\char\the\appendixno
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
|
|
|
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
|
|
% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
|
|
% However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks.
|
|
\def\thischapter{}
|
|
\def\thissection{}
|
|
|
|
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
|
|
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
|
|
|
|
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
|
|
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
|
|
\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
|
|
|
|
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
|
|
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
|
|
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
|
|
|
|
% we only have subsub.
|
|
\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
|
|
%
|
|
% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
|
|
% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
|
|
\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
|
|
%
|
|
% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
|
|
% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
|
|
\def\chapheadtype{N}
|
|
|
|
% Choose a heading macro
|
|
% #1 is heading type
|
|
% #2 is heading level
|
|
% #3 is text for heading
|
|
\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
|
|
% Compute the abs. sec. level:
|
|
\absseclevel=#2
|
|
\advance\absseclevel by \secbase
|
|
% Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel < 0
|
|
\absseclevel = 0
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel > 3
|
|
\absseclevel = 3
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
% The heading type:
|
|
\def\headtype{#1}%
|
|
\if \headtype U%
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
|
|
\chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
% Check for appendix sections:
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel = 0
|
|
\edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
|
|
\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
|
|
\fi\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
% Check for numbered within unnumbered:
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
|
|
\def\headtype{U}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\chardef\unmlevel = 3
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
% Now print the heading:
|
|
\if \headtype U%
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
|
\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
|
|
\or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
|
|
\or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|
\or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
\if \headtype A%
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
|
\appendixzzz{#3}%
|
|
\or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
|
|
\or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|
\or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
|
\chapterzzz{#3}%
|
|
\or \seczzz{#3}%
|
|
\or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|
\or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\suppressfirstparagraphindent
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% an interface:
|
|
\def\numhead{\genhead N}
|
|
\def\apphead{\genhead A}
|
|
\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
|
|
|
|
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
|
|
% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
|
|
%
|
|
% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
|
|
% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
|
|
\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
|
|
%
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
|
|
\def\chapterzzz#1{%
|
|
% section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
|
|
% as an @include file.
|
|
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
|
\global\advance\chapno by 1
|
|
%
|
|
% Used for \float.
|
|
\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
|
|
\resetallfloatnos
|
|
%
|
|
\message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Write the actual heading.
|
|
\chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
|
|
%
|
|
% So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
|
|
\global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
|
|
\def\appendixzzz#1{%
|
|
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
|
\global\advance\appendixno by 1
|
|
\gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
|
|
\resetallfloatnos
|
|
%
|
|
\def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
|
|
\message{\appendixnum}%
|
|
%
|
|
\chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
|
|
%
|
|
\global\let\section = \appendixsec
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
|
|
\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
|
|
\global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
|
\global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
|
|
%
|
|
% Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
|
|
\global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
|
|
\resetallfloatnos
|
|
%
|
|
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
|
|
% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
|
|
% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
|
|
% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
|
|
% to be executed, not expanded).
|
|
%
|
|
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
|
|
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
|
|
% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
|
|
% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
|
|
% the toc entries.)
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
|
\message{(\the\toks0)}%
|
|
%
|
|
\chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
|
|
%
|
|
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
|
|
% Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
|
|
% an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
|
|
% Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
|
|
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
|
|
\unnmhead0{#1}%
|
|
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @top is like @unnumbered.
|
|
\let\top\unnumbered
|
|
|
|
% Sections.
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
|
|
\def\seczzz#1{%
|
|
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
|
|
\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
|
|
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
|
|
}
|
|
\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
|
|
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
|
|
\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
|
|
\global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Subsections.
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
|
|
\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
|
|
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
|
|
\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
|
|
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
|
|
{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
|
|
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
|
|
\global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
|
|
{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Subsubsections.
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
|
|
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
|
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
|
|
{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
|
|
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
|
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
|
|
{\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
|
|
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
|
\global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
|
\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
|
|
{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
|
|
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
|
|
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
|
|
\let\section = \numberedsec
|
|
\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
|
\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
|
|
|
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
|
|
|
|
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
|
|
% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
|
|
% overlong headings to fold.
|
|
% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
|
|
% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
|
|
% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
|
|
% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
|
|
|
|
|
|
\def\majorheading{%
|
|
{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
|
|
\parsearg\chapheadingzzz
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
|
|
\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
|
|
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}%
|
|
\bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
|
|
\suppressfirstparagraphindent
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
|
|
\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
|
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
|
\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
|
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
|
\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
|
\suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
|
|
|
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
|
|
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
|
|
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
|
|
|
|
%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
|
|
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
|
|
|
|
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
|
|
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
|
|
|
|
\newskip\chapheadingskip
|
|
|
|
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
|
|
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
|
\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
|
|
|
|
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
|
|
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
|
|
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGon{%
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
|
|
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
|
|
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
|
|
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
|
|
|
|
\CHAPPAGon
|
|
|
|
% Chapter opening.
|
|
%
|
|
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
|
|
% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
|
|
%
|
|
% To test against our argument.
|
|
\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
|
|
\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
|
|
\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
|
|
\pchapsepmacro
|
|
{%
|
|
\chapfonts \rm
|
|
%
|
|
% Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the
|
|
% xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
|
|
% after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
|
|
% number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
|
|
\def\temptype{#2}%
|
|
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
|
\def\toctype{unnchap}%
|
|
\gdef\thischapter{#1}%
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
|
|
\def\toctype{omit}%
|
|
\gdef\thischapter{}%
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
|
|
\def\toctype{app}%
|
|
% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
|
|
% because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't
|
|
% use \thissection because that changes with each section.
|
|
%
|
|
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter:
|
|
\noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
|
|
\def\toctype{numchap}%
|
|
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno:
|
|
\noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
|
|
% \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
|
|
% entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
|
|
\writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
|
|
%
|
|
% For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
|
|
% the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
|
|
% been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
|
|
% text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
|
|
% being visible, for instance under high magnification.
|
|
\donoderef{#2}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Typeset the actual heading.
|
|
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
|
\hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
|
|
\unhbox0 #1\par}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
|
|
\nobreak
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
|
|
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
|
\def\centerparameters{%
|
|
\advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
|
|
\leftskip = \rightskip
|
|
\parfillskip = 0pt
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
|
|
% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
|
|
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
|
}
|
|
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
|
|
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
|
|
\par\penalty 5000 %
|
|
}
|
|
\def\centerchfopen #1{%
|
|
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
|
\hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
|
}
|
|
\def\CHAPFopen{%
|
|
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
|
|
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
|
|
% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
|
|
%
|
|
\newskip\secheadingskip
|
|
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
|
|
|
|
% Subsection titles.
|
|
\newskip\subsecheadingskip
|
|
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
|
|
|
|
% Subsubsection titles.
|
|
\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
|
|
\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% Print any size, any type, section title.
|
|
%
|
|
% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
|
|
% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
|
|
% section number.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
|
|
{%
|
|
% Switch to the right set of fonts.
|
|
\csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
|
|
%
|
|
% Insert space above the heading.
|
|
\csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
|
|
%
|
|
% Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
|
|
\def\sectionlevel{#2}%
|
|
\def\temptype{#3}%
|
|
%
|
|
\ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
|
\def\toctype{unn}%
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
|
% for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
|
|
% and don't redefine \thissection.
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
|
\def\toctype{omit}%
|
|
\let\sectionlevel=\empty
|
|
\else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
|
|
\def\toctype{app}%
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
|
|
\def\toctype{num}%
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
|
|
\writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
|
|
% Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
|
|
\donoderef{#3}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
|
|
% That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
|
|
% preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
|
|
% \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
|
|
% break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
|
|
% section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
|
|
\nobreak
|
|
%
|
|
% Output the actual section heading.
|
|
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
|
\hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
|
|
\unhbox0 #1}%
|
|
}%
|
|
% Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
|
|
% Don't allow stretch, though.
|
|
\kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
|
|
%
|
|
% Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
|
|
% was followed by glue.
|
|
\nobreak
|
|
%
|
|
% We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
|
|
% glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
|
|
% discardable item.)
|
|
\vskip-\parskip
|
|
%
|
|
% This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
|
|
% 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
|
|
% section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
|
|
%
|
|
% @section sec-whatever
|
|
% @deffn def-whatever
|
|
\penalty 10001
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{toc,}
|
|
% Table of contents.
|
|
\newwrite\tocfile
|
|
|
|
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
|
|
% Called from @chapter, etc.
|
|
%
|
|
% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
|
|
% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
|
|
% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
|
|
% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
|
|
% destination to jump to.
|
|
%
|
|
% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
|
|
% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
|
|
% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
|
|
% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
|
|
%
|
|
\newif\iftocfileopened
|
|
\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
|
|
%
|
|
\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
|
|
\edef\writetoctype{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
|
|
\iftocfileopened\else
|
|
\immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
|
|
\global\tocfileopenedtrue
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\iflinks
|
|
{\atdummies
|
|
\edef\temp{%
|
|
\write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
|
\temp
|
|
}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
|
|
% writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
|
|
% just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
|
|
% 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
|
|
% two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
|
|
% `1', and two named `2'.
|
|
\ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
|
|
% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
|
|
% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\activecatcodes{%
|
|
\catcode`\"=\active
|
|
\catcode`\$=\active
|
|
\catcode`\<=\active
|
|
\catcode`\>=\active
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active
|
|
\catcode`\^=\active
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
|
\catcode`\|=\active
|
|
\catcode`\~=\active
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
|
|
\def\readtocfile{%
|
|
\setupdatafile
|
|
\activecatcodes
|
|
\input \jobname.toc
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
|
|
\newcount\savepageno
|
|
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
|
|
|
|
% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\startcontents#1{%
|
|
% If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
|
|
% start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
|
|
% \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
|
|
% From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
|
|
\contentsalignmacro
|
|
\immediate\closeout\tocfile
|
|
%
|
|
% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
|
|
% It is abundantly clear what they are.
|
|
\def\thischapter{}%
|
|
\chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
|
|
%
|
|
\savepageno = \pageno
|
|
\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
|
|
\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
|
|
%
|
|
% Roman numerals for page numbers.
|
|
\ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% Normal (long) toc.
|
|
\def\contents{%
|
|
\startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.toc
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
|
\readtocfile
|
|
\fi
|
|
\vfill \eject
|
|
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
|
\pdfmakeoutlines
|
|
\fi
|
|
\closein 1
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
|
\global\pageno = \savepageno
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% And just the chapters.
|
|
\def\summarycontents{%
|
|
\startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
|
|
%
|
|
\let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
|
|
\let\appentry = \shortchapentry
|
|
\let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
|
|
% We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
|
|
\secfonts
|
|
\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
|
|
\let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
|
|
\rm
|
|
\hyphenpenalty = 10000
|
|
\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
|
|
\def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
|
|
\let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|
\let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|
\let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|
\let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|
\let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|
\let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|
\let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|
\let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.toc
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
|
\readtocfile
|
|
\fi
|
|
\closein 1
|
|
\vfill \eject
|
|
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
|
\global\pageno = \savepageno
|
|
}
|
|
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
|
|
|
|
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
|
|
% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
|
|
% This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
|
|
% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
|
|
% But use \hss just in case.
|
|
% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
|
|
% the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
|
|
%
|
|
% We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
|
|
% with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
|
|
% left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
|
|
% chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
|
|
% there are before deciding ...
|
|
\hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
|
|
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
|
|
% The last argument is the page number.
|
|
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
|
|
|
|
% Chapters, in the main contents.
|
|
\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|
%
|
|
% Chapters, in the short toc.
|
|
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
|
|
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
|
|
\tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Appendices, in the main contents.
|
|
% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\appendixbox#1{%
|
|
% We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
|
|
\hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|
|
|
% Unnumbered chapters.
|
|
\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
|
|
\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
|
|
|
|
% Sections.
|
|
\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|
\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
|
|
\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
|
|
|
% Subsections.
|
|
\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|
\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
|
|
\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
|
|
|
% And subsubsections.
|
|
\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
|
\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
|
|
\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
|
|
|
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
|
|
% Same as \defaultparindent.
|
|
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
|
|
|
|
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
|
|
% page number.
|
|
%
|
|
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
|
|
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
|
|
\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
|
|
\penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\chapentryfonts
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
\secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|
|
|
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
\subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|
|
|
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
|
\subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|
|
|
% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
|
|
\let\tocentry = \entry
|
|
|
|
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
|
|
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
|
|
|
|
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
|
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
|
|
|
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
|
|
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
|
\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
|
\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{environments,}
|
|
% @foo ... @end foo.
|
|
|
|
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
|
%
|
|
% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
|
|
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\point{$\star$}
|
|
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
|
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
|
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
|
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
|
|
|
% The @error{} command.
|
|
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
|
%
|
|
\newbox\errorbox
|
|
%
|
|
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
|
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
|
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
|
|
%
|
|
\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
|
\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
|
\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
|
\vbox{%
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2
|
|
\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
|
\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
|
\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2}
|
|
\hfil}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
|
|
|
% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
|
|
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
|
|
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
|
|
|
|
\envdef\tex{%
|
|
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
|
|
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
|
|
\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
|
|
\catcode `\%=14
|
|
\catcode `\+=\other
|
|
\catcode `\"=\other
|
|
\catcode `\|=\other
|
|
\catcode `\<=\other
|
|
\catcode `\>=\other
|
|
\escapechar=`\\
|
|
%
|
|
\let\b=\ptexb
|
|
\let\bullet=\ptexbullet
|
|
\let\c=\ptexc
|
|
\let\,=\ptexcomma
|
|
\let\.=\ptexdot
|
|
\let\dots=\ptexdots
|
|
\let\equiv=\ptexequiv
|
|
\let\!=\ptexexclam
|
|
\let\i=\ptexi
|
|
\let\indent=\ptexindent
|
|
\let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
|
|
\let\{=\ptexlbrace
|
|
\let\+=\tabalign
|
|
\let\}=\ptexrbrace
|
|
\let\/=\ptexslash
|
|
\let\*=\ptexstar
|
|
\let\t=\ptext
|
|
\let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
|
|
%
|
|
\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
|
|
\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
|
}
|
|
% There is no need to define \Etex.
|
|
|
|
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
|
|
% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
|
|
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
|
|
|
|
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
|
|
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
|
|
|
|
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
|
|
% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
|
|
% have any width.
|
|
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
|
|
|
|
% This space is always present above and below environments.
|
|
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
|
|
|
|
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
|
|
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
|
|
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
|
|
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
|
|
% =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
|
|
% \sectionheading, q.v.
|
|
\ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
|
|
\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
|
|
\endgraf
|
|
\ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
|
|
\removelastskip
|
|
% it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
|
|
% or better ...
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
|
|
\vskip\envskipamount
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
|
|
|
|
% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
|
|
% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
|
|
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
|
|
|
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
|
|
% environment contents.
|
|
\font\circle=lcircle10
|
|
\newdimen\circthick
|
|
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
|
|
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
|
|
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
|
|
%
|
|
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
|
|
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
|
|
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
|
|
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
|
|
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
|
\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
|
|
\hskip\rskip}}
|
|
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
|
\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
|
|
\hskip\rskip}}
|
|
%
|
|
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
|
|
|
|
\envdef\cartouche{%
|
|
\ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
|
\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
|
|
\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
|
|
\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
|
|
\advance\cartinner by-\rskip
|
|
\cartouter=\hsize
|
|
\advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
|
|
% side, and for 6pt waste from
|
|
% each corner char, and rule thickness
|
|
\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
|
|
% Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
|
\vbox\bgroup
|
|
\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
|
|
\carttop
|
|
\hbox\bgroup
|
|
\hskip\lskip
|
|
\vrule\kern3pt
|
|
\vbox\bgroup
|
|
\kern3pt
|
|
\hsize=\cartinner
|
|
\baselineskip=\normbskip
|
|
\lineskip=\normlskip
|
|
\parskip=\normpskip
|
|
\vskip -\parskip
|
|
\comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
|
|
}
|
|
\def\Ecartouche{%
|
|
\ifhmode\par\fi
|
|
\kern3pt
|
|
\egroup
|
|
\kern3pt\vrule
|
|
\hskip\rskip
|
|
\egroup
|
|
\cartbot
|
|
\egroup
|
|
\checkinserts
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
|
|
% inside a group.
|
|
\def\nonfillstart{%
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
|
\hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
|
|
\sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
|
|
\let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
|
|
\obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
|
|
\parskip = 0pt
|
|
\parindent = 0pt
|
|
\emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
|
|
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|
\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
|
|
\else
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
|
\fi
|
|
\let\exdent=\nofillexdent
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
|
|
% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
|
|
% This affects the following displayed environments:
|
|
% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
|
|
%
|
|
\def\smallword{small}
|
|
\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
|
|
\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
|
|
\def\setnormaldispenv{%
|
|
\ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
|
|
\smallexamplefonts \rm
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
\def\setsmalldispenv{%
|
|
\ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
|
|
\else
|
|
\smallexamplefonts \rm
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
|
|
% Let's do it by one command:
|
|
\def\makedispenv #1#2{
|
|
\expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
|
|
\expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Define two synonyms:
|
|
\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
|
|
\makedispenv{#1}{#3}
|
|
\makedispenv{#2}{#3}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
|
|
%
|
|
% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
|
|
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
|
|
%
|
|
\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
|
\tt
|
|
\let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
|
|
\gobble % eat return
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
|
|
%
|
|
\makedispenv {display}{%
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
|
\gobble
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
|
|
%
|
|
\makedispenv{format}{%
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
|
\gobble
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
|
|
\envdef\flushleft{%
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
|
\gobble
|
|
}
|
|
\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
|
|
|
|
% @flushright.
|
|
%
|
|
\envdef\flushright{%
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
|
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
|
|
\gobble
|
|
}
|
|
\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
|
|
% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
|
|
% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
|
|
% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
|
|
%
|
|
\envdef\quotation{%
|
|
{\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
|
%
|
|
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
|
|
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|
\advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
|
|
\exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
|
|
\else
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
|
\fi
|
|
\parsearg\quotationlabel
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
|
|
% doing normal filling.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\Equotation{%
|
|
\par
|
|
\ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
|
|
% indent a bit.
|
|
\leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
{\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
|
|
\def\quotationlabel#1{%
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \else
|
|
{\bf #1: }%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
|
|
% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
|
|
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
|
|
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
|
|
%
|
|
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
|
|
%
|
|
% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
|
|
% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
|
|
% verbatim line.
|
|
\def\dospecials{%
|
|
\do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
|
|
\do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
|
|
\do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
|
|
}
|
|
%
|
|
% [Knuth] p. 380
|
|
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
|
|
\def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
|
|
%
|
|
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
|
|
% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
%
|
|
% Setup for the @verb command.
|
|
%
|
|
% Eight spaces for a tab
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
|
\gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
%
|
|
\def\setupverb{%
|
|
\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
|
\def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
|
|
\catcode`\`=\active
|
|
\tabeightspaces
|
|
% Respect line breaks,
|
|
% print special symbols as themselves, and
|
|
% make each space count
|
|
% must do in this order:
|
|
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Setup for the @verbatim environment
|
|
%
|
|
% Real tab expansion
|
|
\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
|
|
%
|
|
\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
|
\gdef\tabexpand{%
|
|
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
|
\def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
|
|
\dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
|
|
\divide\dimen0 by\tabw
|
|
\multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
|
|
\advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
|
|
\wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\def\setupverbatim{%
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t%
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
|
% Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
|
\tt
|
|
\def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
|
|
\catcode`\`=\active
|
|
\tabexpand
|
|
% Respect line breaks,
|
|
% print special symbols as themselves, and
|
|
% make each space count
|
|
% must do in this order:
|
|
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
|
\everypar{\starttabbox}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
|
|
% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
|
|
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
|
|
%
|
|
% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
|
|
%
|
|
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
|
|
\gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
%
|
|
\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
|
|
%
|
|
%
|
|
% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
|
|
% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
|
|
%
|
|
% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
|
|
%
|
|
% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
|
|
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
|
|
% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
|
|
%
|
|
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
|
|
%
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\catcode`\ =\active
|
|
\obeylines %
|
|
% ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
|
|
% of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
|
|
% line in the output.
|
|
\xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
|
|
% We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
|
|
% without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
%
|
|
\envdef\verbatim{%
|
|
\setupverbatim\doverbatim
|
|
}
|
|
\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
|
|
{%
|
|
\makevalueexpandable
|
|
\setupverbatim
|
|
\input #1
|
|
\afterenvbreak
|
|
}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @copying ... @end copying.
|
|
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
|
|
%
|
|
% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
|
|
% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
|
|
% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
|
|
% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
|
|
% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
|
|
% possible is very desirable.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
|
|
\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\insertcopying{%
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
|
|
\scanexp\copyingtext
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\message{defuns,}
|
|
% @defun etc.
|
|
|
|
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
|
|
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
|
|
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
|
|
|
|
% Start the processing of @deffn:
|
|
\def\startdefun{%
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
|
|
\medbreak
|
|
\else
|
|
% If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
|
|
% which is there to keep the function description together with its
|
|
% header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
|
|
% break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
|
|
% by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
|
|
% commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
|
|
% a break between a section heading and a defun.
|
|
%
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
|
|
% But do insert the glue.
|
|
\medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\parindent=0in
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\dodefunx#1{%
|
|
% First, check whether we are in the right environment:
|
|
\checkenv#1%
|
|
%
|
|
% As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
|
|
% It's not a great place, though.
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi
|
|
%
|
|
% And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
|
|
\expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
|
|
}
|
|
\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
|
|
|
|
% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
% call \deffnheader:
|
|
#1#2 \endheader
|
|
% common ending:
|
|
\interlinepenalty = 10000
|
|
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
|
\endgraf
|
|
\nobreak\vskip -\parskip
|
|
\penalty 10002 % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
|
|
% Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
|
|
% rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
|
|
\checkparencounts
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
|
|
|
|
% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
|
|
% the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\makedefun#1{%
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
|
|
\makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
|
|
\temp
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
|
|
%
|
|
% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
|
|
% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
|
|
\envdef#1{%
|
|
\startdefun
|
|
\parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
|
|
\def#3%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
%%% Untyped functions:
|
|
|
|
% @deffn category name args
|
|
\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
|
|
|
|
% @deffn category class name args
|
|
\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
|
|
|
|
% \defopon {category on}class name args
|
|
\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
|
|
|
% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
|
|
%
|
|
\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
|
|
% Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
|
|
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
|
|
\defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
%%% Typed functions:
|
|
|
|
% @deftypefn category type name args
|
|
\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
|
|
|
|
% @deftypeop category class type name args
|
|
\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
|
|
|
|
% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
|
|
\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
|
|
|
% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
|
|
%
|
|
\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
|
|
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
|
|
\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
%%% Typed variables:
|
|
|
|
% @deftypevr category type var args
|
|
\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
|
|
|
|
% @deftypecv category class type var args
|
|
\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
|
|
|
|
% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
|
|
\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
|
|
|
% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
|
|
%
|
|
\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
|
|
\dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
|
|
\defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
%%% Untyped variables:
|
|
|
|
% @defvr category var args
|
|
\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
|
|
|
|
% @defcv category class var args
|
|
\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
|
|
|
|
% \defcvof {category of}class var args
|
|
\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
|
|
|
|
%%% Type:
|
|
% @deftp category name args
|
|
\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
|
|
\doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
|
|
\defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
|
|
\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
|
|
\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
|
|
\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
|
|
\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
|
|
\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
|
|
\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
|
|
\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
|
|
\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
|
|
\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
|
|
\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
|
|
\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
|
|
|
|
% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
|
|
% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
|
|
% #2 is the return type, if any.
|
|
% #3 is the function name.
|
|
%
|
|
% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\defname#1#2#3{%
|
|
% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
|
|
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
|
%
|
|
% How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
|
|
% distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
|
|
% just below it.
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
|
|
%
|
|
% Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
|
|
% The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
|
|
% we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
|
|
\dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
|
|
% The continuations:
|
|
\dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
|
|
% (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
|
|
\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
|
|
%
|
|
% Put the type name to the right margin.
|
|
\noindent
|
|
\hbox to 0pt{%
|
|
\hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
|
|
% \hsize has to be shortened this way:
|
|
\kern\leftskip
|
|
% Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
|
|
}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
|
|
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
|
{%
|
|
% defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
|
|
% . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
|
|
% . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
|
|
% common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
|
|
% tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
|
|
% . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
|
|
% . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
|
|
% one has made identifiers using them :).
|
|
\df \tt
|
|
\def\temp{#2}% return value type
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
|
|
#3% output function name
|
|
}%
|
|
{\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
|
|
%
|
|
\boldbrax
|
|
% arguments will be output next, if any.
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
|
|
% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
|
|
% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
|
|
% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\defunargs#1{%
|
|
% use sl by default (not ttsl),
|
|
% tt for the names.
|
|
\df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
|
|
%
|
|
% On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
|
|
% want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
|
|
\let\var=\ttslanted
|
|
#1%
|
|
\sl\hyphenchar\font=45
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\activeparens{%
|
|
\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
|
|
\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
|
|
\catcode`\&=\active
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
|
|
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
|
|
|
|
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
|
|
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
|
|
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
|
|
{
|
|
\activeparens
|
|
\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
|
|
\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
|
|
\global\let& = \&
|
|
|
|
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
|
|
\gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\newcount\parencount
|
|
|
|
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
|
|
\newif\ifampseen
|
|
\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
|
|
|
|
\def\parenfont{%
|
|
\ifampseen
|
|
% At the first level, print parens in roman,
|
|
% otherwise use the default font.
|
|
\ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
|
|
\else
|
|
% The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
|
|
% the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
|
|
\sf
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
\def\infirstlevel#1{%
|
|
\ifampseen
|
|
\ifnum\parencount=1
|
|
#1%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
|
|
|
|
\def\opnr{%
|
|
\global\advance\parencount by 1
|
|
{\parenfont(}%
|
|
\infirstlevel \bfafterword
|
|
}
|
|
\def\clnr{%
|
|
{\parenfont)}%
|
|
\infirstlevel \sl
|
|
\global\advance\parencount by -1
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\newcount\brackcount
|
|
\def\lbrb{%
|
|
\global\advance\brackcount by 1
|
|
{\bf[}%
|
|
}
|
|
\def\rbrb{%
|
|
{\bf]}%
|
|
\global\advance\brackcount by -1
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\checkparencounts{%
|
|
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
|
|
\ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
|
|
}
|
|
\def\badparencount{%
|
|
\errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}%
|
|
\global\parencount=0
|
|
}
|
|
\def\badbrackcount{%
|
|
\errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}%
|
|
\global\brackcount=0
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{macros,}
|
|
% @macro.
|
|
|
|
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
|
|
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
|
|
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
|
|
\newwrite\macscribble
|
|
\def\scantokens#1{%
|
|
\toks0={#1}%
|
|
\immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
|
|
\immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
|
|
\immediate\closeout\macscribble
|
|
\input \jobname.tmp
|
|
}
|
|
\fi
|
|
|
|
\def\scanmacro#1{%
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\newlinechar`\^^M
|
|
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
|
|
% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
|
|
% When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
|
|
% backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
|
|
% \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
|
|
% with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
|
|
\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
|
|
% ... and \example
|
|
\spaceisspace
|
|
%
|
|
% Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
|
|
%
|
|
% I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
|
|
% --kasal, 29nov03
|
|
\scantokens{#1\endinput}%
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\scanexp#1{%
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
|
|
\temp
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
|
|
\newtoks\macname % Macro name
|
|
\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
|
|
|
|
% List of all defined macros in the form
|
|
% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
|
|
% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
|
|
% if there is a need.
|
|
\def\macrolist{}
|
|
|
|
% Add the macro to \macrolist
|
|
\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
|
|
\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
|
|
\xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Utility routines.
|
|
% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
|
|
% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
|
|
% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\cslet#1#2{%
|
|
\expandafter\let
|
|
\csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
|
|
\csname#2\endcsname
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
|
|
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
|
|
{\catcode`\@=11
|
|
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
|
|
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
|
|
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
|
|
\def\unbrace#1{#1}
|
|
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
|
|
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
|
|
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
|
|
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
|
|
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
|
|
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
|
|
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
|
|
|
|
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
|
|
% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
|
|
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
|
|
|
|
\def\scanctxt{%
|
|
\catcode`\"=\other
|
|
\catcode`\+=\other
|
|
\catcode`\<=\other
|
|
\catcode`\>=\other
|
|
\catcode`\@=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^=\other
|
|
\catcode`\_=\other
|
|
\catcode`\|=\other
|
|
\catcode`\~=\other
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\scanargctxt{%
|
|
\scanctxt
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\other
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\macrobodyctxt{%
|
|
\scanctxt
|
|
\catcode`\{=\other
|
|
\catcode`\}=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=\other
|
|
\usembodybackslash
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\macroargctxt{%
|
|
\scanctxt
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
|
|
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
|
|
% where N is the macro parameter number.
|
|
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
|
|
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
|
|
|
|
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
|
|
@gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
|
|
@gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
|
|
}
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
|
|
|
|
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
|
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
|
|
|
\def\macroxxx#1{%
|
|
\getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
|
|
\ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
|
|
\paramno=0%
|
|
\else
|
|
\expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
|
|
\message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
|
|
\else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
|
|
\global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
|
|
\global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
|
|
\addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\begingroup \macrobodyctxt
|
|
\ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
|
|
\else \expandafter\parsemacbody
|
|
\fi}
|
|
|
|
\parseargdef\unmacro{%
|
|
\if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
|
|
\global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
|
|
\global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
|
|
% Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
|
|
\let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
|
|
\xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\else
|
|
\errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
|
|
% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\unmacrodo#1{%
|
|
\ifx #1\relax
|
|
% remove this
|
|
\else
|
|
\noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
|
|
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
|
|
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
|
|
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
|
|
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
|
|
\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
|
|
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
|
|
|
|
% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
|
|
% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
|
|
% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
|
|
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
|
|
|
|
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
|
|
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
|
|
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
|
|
% it to # just before using the token list produced.
|
|
%
|
|
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
|
|
% the macro is used.
|
|
|
|
\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
|
|
\let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
|
|
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
|
|
\if#1;\let\next=\relax
|
|
\else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
|
|
\advance\paramno by 1%
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
|
|
{\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
|
|
\edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
|
|
\fi\next}
|
|
|
|
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
|
|
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
|
|
|
|
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
|
|
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
|
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
|
|
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
|
|
|
% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
|
|
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
|
|
% Much magic with \expandafter here.
|
|
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
|
|
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
|
|
\def\defmacro{%
|
|
\let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
|
|
\ifrecursive
|
|
\ifcase\paramno
|
|
% 0
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
|
\or % 1
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|
\noexpand\braceorline
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
|
\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
|
\else % many
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|
\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
|
\expandafter\xdef
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
|
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
|
\paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifcase\paramno
|
|
% 0
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
|
\or % 1
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|
\noexpand\braceorline
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
|
\egroup
|
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
|
\else % many
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
|
\expandafter\xdef
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
|
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
|
\paramlist{%
|
|
\egroup
|
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi}
|
|
|
|
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
|
|
|
|
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
|
|
% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
|
|
% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
|
|
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
|
|
\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
|
|
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
|
|
\ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
|
|
\expandafter\parsearg
|
|
\fi \next}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @alias.
|
|
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
|
|
% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
|
|
\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
|
|
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
|
|
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
|
|
{%
|
|
\expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
|
|
\addtomacrolist{#1}%
|
|
\xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\next
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{cross references,}
|
|
|
|
\newwrite\auxfile
|
|
|
|
\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
|
|
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
|
|
|
|
% @inforef is relatively simple.
|
|
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
|
|
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
|
|
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
|
|
|
|
% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
|
|
% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
|
|
% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
|
|
% @node foo , bar , ...
|
|
% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
|
|
%
|
|
% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
|
|
% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
|
|
\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
|
|
\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
|
|
|
|
\let\nwnode=\node
|
|
\let\lastnode=\empty
|
|
|
|
% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
|
|
% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\donoderef#1{%
|
|
\ifx\lastnode\empty\else
|
|
\setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
|
|
\global\let\lastnode=\empty
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
|
|
%
|
|
\newcount\savesfregister
|
|
%
|
|
\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
|
|
\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
|
|
\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
|
|
|
|
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
|
|
% anchor), which consists of three parts:
|
|
% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection,
|
|
% or the anchor name.
|
|
% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
|
|
% empty for anchors.
|
|
% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
|
|
%
|
|
% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
|
|
% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
|
|
% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\setref#1#2{%
|
|
\pdfmkdest{#1}%
|
|
\iflinks
|
|
{%
|
|
\atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
|
|
\edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
|
|
\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
|
|
##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
|
|
}%
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}%
|
|
\immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
|
|
\immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
|
|
\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout
|
|
}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
|
|
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
|
|
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
|
|
% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
|
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
|
\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
|
|
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
|
\setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
|
|
\ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
|
|
% No printed node name was explicitly given.
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
|
|
% Use the node name inside the square brackets.
|
|
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|
\else
|
|
% Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
|
|
% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
|
|
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
|
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
|
|
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifhavexrefs
|
|
% We know the real title if we have the xref values.
|
|
\def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
|
|
\else
|
|
% Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
|
|
\def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
|
\fi%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Make link in pdf output.
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|
\leavevmode
|
|
\getfilename{#4}%
|
|
{\turnoffactive
|
|
% See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
|
|
{\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
|
|
\backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
|
|
%
|
|
\ifnum\filenamelength>0
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
|
goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
|
goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}%
|
|
\linkcolor
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
|
|
% instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
|
|
% LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
|
|
{%
|
|
% Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
|
|
% include an _ in the xref name, etc.
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
|
\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
|
|
\csname XR#1-title\endcsname
|
|
}%
|
|
\iffloat\Xthisreftitle
|
|
% If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
|
|
% print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
|
|
\refx{#1-snt}{}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\printedrefname
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
|
|
% "in MANUALNAME".
|
|
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
|
\space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
% node/anchor (non-float) references.
|
|
%
|
|
% If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
|
|
% insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
|
|
% not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
|
|
% are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
|
|
% is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
|
|
% is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
|
|
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
|
\putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
|
\else
|
|
% _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
|
|
% control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
|
|
% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
|
|
% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
|
|
% printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
|
|
{\turnoffactive
|
|
% Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
|
|
% @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
|
|
\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
|
|
\ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
|
|
}%
|
|
% output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
|
|
\xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
|
|
%
|
|
% But we always want a comma and a space:
|
|
,\space
|
|
%
|
|
% output the `page 3'.
|
|
\turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\endlink
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|
|
|
% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
|
|
% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
|
|
% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
|
|
% one that Bob is working on :).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
|
|
|
|
% Things referred to by \setref.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\Ynothing{}
|
|
\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
|
|
\def\Ynumbered{%
|
|
\ifnum\secno=0
|
|
\putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
|
|
\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
|
|
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
|
|
\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
|
|
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
|
|
\else
|
|
\putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
|
}
|
|
\def\Yappendix{%
|
|
\ifnum\secno=0
|
|
\putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
|
|
\else \ifnum\subsecno=0
|
|
\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
|
|
\else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
|
|
\putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
|
|
\else
|
|
\putwordSection@tie
|
|
@char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
|
|
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\refx#1#2{%
|
|
{%
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|
\otherbackslash
|
|
\expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
|
|
\csname XR#1\endcsname
|
|
}%
|
|
\ifx\thisrefX\relax
|
|
% If not defined, say something at least.
|
|
\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
|
|
\iflinks
|
|
\ifhavexrefs
|
|
\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\ifwarnedxrefs\else
|
|
\global\warnedxrefstrue
|
|
\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
% It's defined, so just use it.
|
|
\thisrefX
|
|
\fi
|
|
#2% Output the suffix in any case.
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
|
|
% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
|
|
% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\xrdef#1#2{%
|
|
\expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value.
|
|
%
|
|
% Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
|
|
\expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname
|
|
% it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
|
|
\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
|
|
%
|
|
% Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
|
|
\toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
|
|
\else
|
|
% had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
|
|
% for later use in \listoffloats.
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\tryauxfile{%
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.aux
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
|
\readdatafile{aux}%
|
|
\global\havexrefstrue
|
|
\fi
|
|
\closein 1
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\setupdatafile{%
|
|
\catcode`\^^@=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^A=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^B=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^C=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^D=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^E=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^F=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^G=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^H=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^K=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^L=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^N=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^P=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^Q=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^R=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^S=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^T=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^U=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^V=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^W=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^X=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^Z=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^[=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^\=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^]=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^^=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^^_=\other
|
|
% It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
|
|
% in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
|
|
% supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
|
|
% that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
|
|
% character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
|
|
% b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
|
|
% argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
|
|
% all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
|
|
%
|
|
% The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
|
|
% \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
|
|
% and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
|
|
%
|
|
\catcode`\^=\other
|
|
%
|
|
% Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
|
|
\catcode`\~=\other
|
|
\catcode`\[=\other
|
|
\catcode`\]=\other
|
|
\catcode`\"=\other
|
|
\catcode`\_=\other
|
|
\catcode`\|=\other
|
|
\catcode`\<=\other
|
|
\catcode`\>=\other
|
|
\catcode`\$=\other
|
|
\catcode`\#=\other
|
|
\catcode`\&=\other
|
|
\catcode`\%=\other
|
|
\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
|
|
%
|
|
% This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
|
|
% characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
|
|
% leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
|
|
% character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
|
|
% of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
|
|
% should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
|
|
% now. --karl, 15jan04.
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
|
%
|
|
% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
|
|
{%
|
|
\count1=128
|
|
\def\loop{%
|
|
\catcode\count1=\other
|
|
\advance\count1 by 1
|
|
\ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
|
|
}%
|
|
}%
|
|
%
|
|
% @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
|
|
\catcode`\{=1
|
|
\catcode`\}=2
|
|
\catcode`\@=0
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\def\readdatafile#1{%
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\setupdatafile
|
|
\input\jobname.#1
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|
|
|
\message{insertions,}
|
|
% including footnotes.
|
|
|
|
\newcount \footnoteno
|
|
|
|
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
|
|
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
|
|
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
|
|
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
|
|
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
|
|
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
|
|
|
|
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
|
|
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
|
|
|
|
{\catcode `\@=11
|
|
%
|
|
% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
|
|
\gdef\footnote{%
|
|
\let\indent=\ptexindent
|
|
\let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
|
|
\global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
|
|
\edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
|
|
%
|
|
% In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
|
|
% extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
|
|
\let\@sf\empty
|
|
\ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
|
|
\unskip
|
|
\thisfootno\@sf
|
|
\dofootnote
|
|
}%
|
|
|
|
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
|
|
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
|
|
%
|
|
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
|
|
% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
|
|
% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
|
|
%
|
|
\gdef\dofootnote{%
|
|
\insert\footins\bgroup
|
|
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
|
|
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
|
|
% So reset some parameters.
|
|
\hsize=\pagewidth
|
|
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
|
|
\splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
|
|
\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
|
|
\floatingpenalty\@MM
|
|
\leftskip\z@skip
|
|
\rightskip\z@skip
|
|
\spaceskip\z@skip
|
|
\xspaceskip\z@skip
|
|
\parindent\defaultparindent
|
|
%
|
|
\smallfonts \rm
|
|
%
|
|
% Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
|
|
% to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
|
|
% hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
|
|
% text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
|
|
\let\noindent = \relax
|
|
%
|
|
% Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
|
|
% footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
|
|
\everypar = {\hang}%
|
|
\textindent{\thisfootno}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
|
|
% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
|
|
% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
|
|
\footstrut
|
|
\futurelet\next\fo@t
|
|
}
|
|
}%end \catcode `\@=11
|
|
|
|
% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
|
|
% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
|
|
% would be lost.
|
|
% Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
|
|
% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
|
|
% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
|
|
|
|
% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
|
|
% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
|
|
% out prematurely.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\startsavinginserts{%
|
|
\ifx \insert\ptexinsert
|
|
\let\insert\saveinsert
|
|
\else
|
|
\let\checkinserts\relax
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
|
|
% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\saveinsert#1{%
|
|
\edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
|
|
\afterassignment\next
|
|
% swallow the left brace
|
|
\let\temp =
|
|
}
|
|
\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
|
|
\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
|
|
|
|
\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
|
|
|
|
\def\placesaveins#1{%
|
|
\ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
|
|
{\box#1}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
|
|
{
|
|
\def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
|
|
\gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% initialization:
|
|
\def\newsaveins #1{%
|
|
\edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
|
|
\next
|
|
}
|
|
\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
|
|
\csname newbox\endcsname #1%
|
|
\expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
|
|
\checksaveins #1}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% initialize:
|
|
\let\checkinserts\empty
|
|
\newsaveins\footins
|
|
\newsaveins\margin
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
|
|
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
|
|
%
|
|
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
|
|
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
|
|
% undone and the next image would fail.
|
|
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
|
% Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
|
|
% doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
|
|
\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
|
|
\input epsf.tex
|
|
\fi
|
|
\closein 1
|
|
%
|
|
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
|
|
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
|
|
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
|
|
work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
|
|
it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
|
|
%
|
|
\def\image#1{%
|
|
\ifx\epsfbox\undefined
|
|
\ifwarnednoepsf \else
|
|
\errhelp = \noepsfhelp
|
|
\errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
|
|
\global\warnednoepsftrue
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
\imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
%
|
|
% Arguments to @image:
|
|
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
|
|
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
|
|
% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
|
|
% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
|
|
% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
|
|
\newif\ifimagevmode
|
|
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
|
|
\catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
|
|
\normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
|
|
% If the image is by itself, center it.
|
|
\ifvmode
|
|
\imagevmodetrue
|
|
\nobreak\bigskip
|
|
% Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
|
|
% \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
|
|
% above and below.
|
|
\nobreak\vskip\parskip
|
|
\nobreak
|
|
\line\bgroup
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Output the image.
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|
\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
|
\else
|
|
% \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
|
|
\epsfbox{#1.eps}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\ifimagevmode \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image
|
|
\endgroup}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
|
|
% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
|
|
% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
|
|
%
|
|
\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
|
|
|
|
% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
|
|
\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
|
|
|
|
% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
|
|
% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
|
|
% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
|
|
%
|
|
% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
|
|
% be referable.
|
|
%
|
|
% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
|
|
% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
|
|
%
|
|
% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
|
|
% chapter-level command.
|
|
\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
|
|
%
|
|
\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
|
|
\let\thiscaption=\empty
|
|
\let\thisshortcaption=\empty
|
|
%
|
|
% don't lose footnotes inside @float.
|
|
%
|
|
% BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
|
|
% insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
|
|
%
|
|
\startsavinginserts
|
|
%
|
|
% We can't be used inside a paragraph.
|
|
\par
|
|
%
|
|
\vtop\bgroup
|
|
\def\floattype{#1}%
|
|
\def\floatlabel{#2}%
|
|
\def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
|
|
%
|
|
\ifx\floattype\empty
|
|
\let\safefloattype=\empty
|
|
\else
|
|
{%
|
|
% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
|
|
% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
|
\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
|
|
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
|
% We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
|
|
% Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
|
|
%
|
|
\expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
|
|
\global\advance\floatno by 1
|
|
%
|
|
{%
|
|
% This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the
|
|
% XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
|
|
% labels (which have a completely different output format) from
|
|
% node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
|
|
% lists of floats.
|
|
%
|
|
\edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
|
|
\setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% start with \parskip glue, I guess.
|
|
\vskip\parskip
|
|
%
|
|
% Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
|
|
\restorefirstparagraphindent
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% we have these possibilities:
|
|
% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
|
|
% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
|
|
% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
|
|
% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
|
|
% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
|
|
% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
|
|
% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
|
|
% @float & no caption:
|
|
%
|
|
\def\Efloat{%
|
|
\let\floatident = \empty
|
|
%
|
|
% In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
|
|
\ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
|
|
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
|
\ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
|
|
\appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
% the number.
|
|
\appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
|
|
% \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
|
|
\let\captionline = \floatident
|
|
%
|
|
\ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
|
|
\ifx\floatident\empty \else
|
|
\appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% caption text.
|
|
\appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
|
|
% Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
|
|
\ifx\captionline\empty \else
|
|
\vskip.5\parskip
|
|
\captionline
|
|
%
|
|
% Space below caption.
|
|
\vskip\parskip
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
% If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
|
|
% after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
|
|
\ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
|
% Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
|
|
% \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
|
|
% caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
|
|
{%
|
|
\atdummies
|
|
%
|
|
% since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
|
|
% is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
|
|
% we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
|
|
\scanexp{%
|
|
\xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
|
|
\ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
|
|
\thiscaption
|
|
\else
|
|
\thisshortcaption
|
|
\fi
|
|
}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
|
|
\ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
|
|
}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\egroup % end of \vtop
|
|
%
|
|
% place the captured inserts
|
|
%
|
|
% BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
|
|
% whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
|
|
% float. --kasal, 26may04
|
|
%
|
|
\checkinserts
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
|
|
\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @caption, @shortcaption
|
|
%
|
|
\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
|
|
\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
|
|
\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
|
|
\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
|
|
|
|
% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
|
|
% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
|
|
\def\getfloatno#1{%
|
|
\ifx#1\relax
|
|
% Haven't seen this figure type before.
|
|
\csname newcount\endcsname #1%
|
|
%
|
|
% Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
|
|
\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
|
|
\expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\let\floatno#1%
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
|
|
% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
|
|
% first read the @float command.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
|
|
|
|
% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
|
|
% distinguish floats from other xref types.
|
|
\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
|
|
|
|
% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
|
|
% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
|
|
% \thissection value which we \setref above.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
|
|
%
|
|
% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
|
|
% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
|
\def\iffloattype{#2}%
|
|
\ifx\temp\floatmagic
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
|
|
\def\floattype{#1}% floattype
|
|
{%
|
|
% the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
|
|
% but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
|
\turnoffactive
|
|
\xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
|
|
}%
|
|
%
|
|
% \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
|
|
\ifhavexrefs
|
|
% if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
|
|
\message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
|
|
\fi
|
|
\else
|
|
\begingroup
|
|
\leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
|
|
\let\do=\listoffloatsdo
|
|
\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
|
|
% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
|
|
% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
|
|
% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
|
|
%
|
|
% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
|
|
% they won't appear in the aux file).
|
|
%
|
|
\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
|
|
\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
|
|
% Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
|
|
% pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
|
|
% page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
|
|
% in pdf output.
|
|
\toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
|
|
%
|
|
% use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
|
|
\edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
|
|
\writeentry
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
\message{localization,}
|
|
% and i18n.
|
|
|
|
% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
|
|
% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything
|
|
% properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
|
|
% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
|
|
\tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
|
|
% Read the file if it exists.
|
|
\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
|
\errhelp = \nolanghelp
|
|
\errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\input txi-#1.tex
|
|
\fi
|
|
\closein 1
|
|
\endgroup
|
|
}
|
|
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
|
|
is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory
|
|
should work if nowhere else does.}
|
|
|
|
|
|
% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
|
|
% likely, but for now just recognize it.
|
|
\let\documentencoding = \comment
|
|
|
|
|
|
% Page size parameters.
|
|
%
|
|
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
|
|
|
|
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
|
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
|
|
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
|
|
|
|
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
|
|
\vbadness = 10000
|
|
|
|
% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
|
|
\hbadness = 2000
|
|
|
|
% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
|
|
\widowpenalty=10000
|
|
\clubpenalty=10000
|
|
|
|
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
|
|
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
|
|
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
|
|
% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\setemergencystretch{%
|
|
\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
|
|
% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
|
|
\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
|
|
\else
|
|
\emergencystretch = .15\hsize
|
|
\fi
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
|
|
% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
|
|
% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
|
|
%
|
|
% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
|
|
% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
|
|
\voffset = #3\relax
|
|
\topskip = #6\relax
|
|
\splittopskip = \topskip
|
|
%
|
|
\vsize = #1\relax
|
|
\advance\vsize by \topskip
|
|
\outervsize = \vsize
|
|
\advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
|
|
\pageheight = \vsize
|
|
%
|
|
\hsize = #2\relax
|
|
\outerhsize = \hsize
|
|
\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
|
|
\pagewidth = \hsize
|
|
%
|
|
\normaloffset = #4\relax
|
|
\bindingoffset = #5\relax
|
|
%
|
|
\ifpdf
|
|
\pdfpageheight #7\relax
|
|
\pdfpagewidth #8\relax
|
|
\fi
|
|
%
|
|
\setleading{\textleading}
|
|
%
|
|
\parindent = \defaultparindent
|
|
\setemergencystretch
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% @letterpaper (the default).
|
|
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
|
\textleading = 13.2pt
|
|
%
|
|
% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
|
|
\internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}%
|
|
{\voffset}{.25in}%
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
|
|
{11in}{8.5in}%
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
|
|
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
|
|
\textleading = 12pt
|
|
%
|
|
\internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
|
|
{\voffset}{.25in}%
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
|
|
{9.25in}{7in}%
|
|
%
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
|
|
\tolerance = 700
|
|
\hfuzz = 1pt
|
|
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
|
\defbodyindent = .5cm
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
|
|
% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
|
|
\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
\parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
|
|
\textleading = 12pt
|
|
%
|
|
\internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
|
|
{-.2in}{-.4in}%
|
|
{0pt}{14pt}%
|
|
{9in}{6in}%
|
|
%
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0.25in
|
|
\tolerance = 700
|
|
\hfuzz = 1pt
|
|
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
|
\defbodyindent = .4cm
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
|
|
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
|
\textleading = 13.2pt
|
|
%
|
|
% Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
|
|
% prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
|
|
% To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
|
|
% \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
|
|
% do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
|
|
% your texinfo source file like this:
|
|
% @tex
|
|
% \global\normaloffset = -6mm
|
|
% \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
|
|
% @end tex
|
|
\internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm}
|
|
{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
|
{297mm}{210mm}%
|
|
%
|
|
\tolerance = 700
|
|
\hfuzz = 1pt
|
|
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
|
\defbodyindent = 5mm
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
|
|
% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
|
|
% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
|
|
\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
|
|
\textleading = 12.5pt
|
|
%
|
|
\internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
|
|
{\voffset}{\hoffset}%
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
|
|
{210mm}{148mm}%
|
|
%
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0.2in
|
|
\tolerance = 800
|
|
\hfuzz = 1.2pt
|
|
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
|
\defbodyindent = 2mm
|
|
\tableindent = 12mm
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
|
|
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
\afourpaper
|
|
\internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
|
|
{\voffset}{4.6mm}%
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
|
{297mm}{210mm}%
|
|
%
|
|
% Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
|
|
\globaldefs = 0
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
|
|
\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
|
|
\afourpaper
|
|
\internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
|
|
{\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
|
{297mm}{210mm}%
|
|
\globaldefs = 0
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
|
|
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
|
|
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
|
|
%
|
|
\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
|
|
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
|
|
\globaldefs = 1
|
|
%
|
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
|
\setleading{\textleading}%
|
|
%
|
|
\dimen0 = #1
|
|
\advance\dimen0 by \voffset
|
|
%
|
|
\dimen2 = \hsize
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
|
|
%
|
|
\internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
|
|
{\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
|
|
{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
|
{\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
|
|
}}
|
|
|
|
% Set default to letter.
|
|
%
|
|
\letterpaper
|
|
|
|
|
|
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
|
|
|
|
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
|
|
\catcode`\"=\other
|
|
\catcode`\~=\other
|
|
\catcode`\^=\other
|
|
\catcode`\_=\other
|
|
\catcode`\|=\other
|
|
\catcode`\<=\other
|
|
\catcode`\>=\other
|
|
\catcode`\+=\other
|
|
\catcode`\$=\other
|
|
\def\normaldoublequote{"}
|
|
\def\normaltilde{~}
|
|
\def\normalcaret{^}
|
|
\def\normalunderscore{_}
|
|
\def\normalverticalbar{|}
|
|
\def\normalless{<}
|
|
\def\normalgreater{>}
|
|
\def\normalplus{+}
|
|
\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
|
|
|
|
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
|
|
% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
|
|
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
|
|
%
|
|
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
|
|
% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
|
|
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
|
|
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
|
|
%
|
|
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
|
|
|
% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
|
|
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
|
|
% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
|
|
% this is not a problem.
|
|
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
|
|
|
% Turn off all special characters except @
|
|
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
|
|
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
|
|
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
|
|
|
|
\catcode`\"=\active
|
|
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
|
|
\let"=\activedoublequote
|
|
\catcode`\~=\active
|
|
\def~{{\tt\char126}}
|
|
\chardef\hat=`\^
|
|
\catcode`\^=\active
|
|
\def^{{\tt \hat}}
|
|
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
|
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
|
|
\let\realunder=_
|
|
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
|
|
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
|
|
|
|
\catcode`\|=\active
|
|
\def|{{\tt\char124}}
|
|
\chardef \less=`\<
|
|
\catcode`\<=\active
|
|
\def<{{\tt \less}}
|
|
\chardef \gtr=`\>
|
|
\catcode`\>=\active
|
|
\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
|
|
\catcode`\+=\active
|
|
\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
|
|
\catcode`\$=\active
|
|
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
|
|
|
|
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
|
|
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
|
|
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
|
|
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
|
|
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
|
|
|
|
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
|
|
% parsing them.
|
|
\def\turnoffactive{%
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
|
\otherbackslash
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
\catcode`\@=0
|
|
|
|
% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
|
|
% as in \char`\\.
|
|
\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
|
|
\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
|
|
|
|
% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
|
|
% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
|
|
{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
|
|
|
|
% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
|
|
% in fixed width font.
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active
|
|
@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
|
|
% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
|
|
% @let \ = @normalbackslash
|
|
|
|
% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
|
|
% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
|
|
% catcode other.
|
|
@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
|
|
@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
|
|
|
|
% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
|
|
% the literal character `\'.
|
|
%
|
|
@def@normalturnoffactive{%
|
|
@let\=@normalbackslash
|
|
@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
|
@let~=@normaltilde
|
|
@let^=@normalcaret
|
|
@let_=@normalunderscore
|
|
@let|=@normalverticalbar
|
|
@let<=@normalless
|
|
@let>=@normalgreater
|
|
@let+=@normalplus
|
|
@let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
|
|
@unsepspaces
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
|
|
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
|
|
@otherifyactive
|
|
|
|
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
|
|
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
|
|
% a backslash.
|
|
%
|
|
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
|
|
@global@let\ = @eatinput
|
|
|
|
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
|
|
% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
|
|
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
|
|
% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
|
|
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
|
|
%
|
|
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
|
|
@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
|
|
@catcode`+=@active
|
|
@catcode`@_=@active
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
|
|
@escapechar = `@@
|
|
|
|
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
|
|
@catcode`@& = @other
|
|
@catcode`@# = @other
|
|
@catcode`@% = @other
|
|
|
|
|
|
@c Local variables:
|
|
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
|
|
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
|
|
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
|
|
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
|
|
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
|
|
@c End:
|
|
|
|
@c vim:sw=2:
|
|
|
|
@ignore
|
|
arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
|
|
@end ignore
|